SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic
products may have either labels similar to the graphics
shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on
this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to
the presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the product.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of
uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of
sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of
electrical shock.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products
are tested and approved by an independent safety testing
laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner,
all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify
this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically
authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety
standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at
the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to
change or modify any of the specifications without notice or
obligation to update existing units.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce
products that are both user safe and environmentally
friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the
production methods used to produce them, meet these goals.
In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we
want you to be aware of the following:
Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small nonrechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in
place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform
the replacement.
Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by
applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required
by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have
the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for
you.
Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged
beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that
contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.
NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the
unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your
dealer before requesting service.
NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates
the location of the name plate. The model number, serial
number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate.
You should record the model number, serial number, and the
date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this
manual as a permanent record of your purchase.
AUX OUT
R
L/L+R
AUX IN
R
IN
L/L+R
MIDI
OUT
THRU
FOOT SWITCH
FOOT VOLUME
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
AVIS: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
1
2
AC INLET
Model _____________________________________
Serial No. __________________________________
Purchase Date ______________________________
92-469 1
Owner’s Manual
English
Bedienungsanleitung
Deutsch
Mode d’emploi
Français
Congratulations!
You are the proud owner of an extraordinary electronic keyboard. The Yamaha
PSR-7000 PortaTone combines the most advanced AWM tone generation technology with state-of-the-art digital electronics and features to give you stunning sound
quality with maximum musical enjoyment. The advanced Auto Accompaniment and
One Touch Setting features, in particular, are brilliant examples of how Yamaha
technology can significantly expand your musical horizons. A new large-size
graphic display and easy-to-use interface also greatly enhance the operability of
this advanced instrument.
In order to make the most of your PortaTone’s features and vast performance
potential, we urge you to read the manuals thoroughly while trying out the various
features described. Keep the manuals in a safe place for later reference.
Contents
Taking Care of Your PortaTone
2
Floppy Disks & the Disk Drive ........... 3
Using the Accompaniment
Section
■
Panel Controls
4
Connections & Music Stand
6
■
■
The Demonstration
8
The Random & Single Demo Play
Modes ...................................................... 9
The PSR-7000 Display &
Display-based Controls
One Touch Setting
■
The [MIXER] Button ........................ 10
The [LIST HOLD] Button ................. 11
The [LCD CONTRAST] Control ...... 11
The 5-language Help Function ........ 11
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Playing the PSR-7000
12
■
Before You Begin ............................. 12
■
Selecting & Playing Voices ............. 12
Using the Organ Flute Voices ......... 16
■
■
■
■
■
■
FOOTAGE ....................................... 16
VOLUME & ATTACK ...................... 17
NAME & ROTARY SPEAKER ........ 17
Using the Rotary Speaker Effect ..... 18
Keyboard Percussion ....................... 19
Changing the “L” Split Point .......... 20
Transposition, Tuning, &
Octave Change
21
TRANSPOSE & TUNE ........................ 21
OCTAVE CHANGE .............................. 22
35
THE TEMPO SET FUNCTION ........ 36
Expression & Effects
The Display & Multi-function
Controls ................................................ 10
■
Fade-ins and Fade-outs .................. 30
Accompaniment Volume ................. 30
The Auto Mute Function .................. 30
Changing the “A” Split Point .......... 31
The Chord Assist Function ............. 32
The Arranger Buttons ....................... 34
■
10
Registration Memory
23
37
Harmony .......................................... 37
Sustain ............................................ 37
Touch Response ............................. 38
Reverb ............................................. 38
Chorus ............................................. 39
DSP Effects ..................................... 39
Left Hold .......................................... 39
Pitch Bend Wheel ............................ 40
Modulation Wheel ........................... 40
Digital Equalizer .............................. 41
The Multi Pads
42
The PHRASE/CHORD Mode ............ 42
The PHRASE Pads (pads 1 … 4) ...... 42
■ Recording Phrases .......................... 43
■ Phrase Playback ............................. 44
The CHORD Pads (pads 5 … 8) ....... 44
■ Recording Chords ........................... 44
■ Chord Playback ............................... 45
■ The Repeat & Chord Match Settings46
● REPEAT ...................................... 46
● CHORD MATCH ......................... 46
The PERCUSSION Mode .................. 47
■
■
Assigning Different Instruments
To the PERCUSSION Pads ............ 47
Playing the Percussion Pads .......... 48
49
Registering the Panel Settings ....... 49
Entering a Registration Name .......... 50
Recalling the Registered Panel
Settings ................................................. 51
The Freeze Function .......................... 52
The Freeze Group Settings .............. 52
Song Playback & Recording
53
Song Playback .................................... 53
Pause, Fast Forward & Reverse ..... 54
Chain Playback ................................. 55
Volume & Mute/Solo Settings .......... 56
■
Song Recording .................................. 58
Quick Record ..................................... 60
■ THE TRACK INDICATORS ............. 62
■ TRACK DELETE ............................. 62
■ PLAYBACK ..................................... 62
■ EXITING .......................................... 62
Chord Step Recording ...................... 63
■ DELETING EVENTS ....................... 64
Quick Record Mode Edit Functions ... 65
■ SONG DELETE ............................... 65
Multitrack Record .............................. 66
■ THE TRACK INDICATORS ............. 68
■ TRACK DELETE ............................. 68
■ RECORDING & EFFECTS ............. 68
■ PLAYBACK ..................................... 69
■ EXITING .......................................... 69
Punch-In Recording .......................... 69
Track Volume Control ....................... 72
Multitrack record Mode
Edit Functions ................................... 72
■ QUANTIZE ...................................... 72
■ TRACK COPY/MIX ......................... 73
■ INITIAL EDIT ................................... 74
■ SONG DELETE ............................... 74
Custom Accompaniment
75
Effects ................................................ 79
■ REVERB DEPTH ............................ 79
■ CHORUS TYPE & DEPTH .............. 80
■ PAN ................................................. 80
Edit ..................................................... 81
■ QUANTIZE ...................................... 81
■ COPY .............................................. 81
■ REMOVE EVENT ............................ 82
Store/Clear ......................................... 83
■ STORE ............................................ 83
■ CLEAR CUSTOM STYLE ............... 83
Custom Voice Edit
84
Engaging the Easy/Full Edit Mode 84
■
EXITING .......................................... 84
Format FD ........................................... 102
Song Copy .......................................... 102
HD Utility ............................................. 104
■
■
■
The PSR-7000 “Functions”
■
EDIT .................................................... 85
■ NAME .............................................. 85
■ PAN ................................................. 85
■ VIBRATO ........................................ 85
■ TONE .............................................. 86
■ ENVELOPE ..................................... 86
STORE/CLEAR .................................. 87
■ STORE ............................................ 87
■ CLEAR CUSTOM VOICE ............... 87
■
■
■
Load From Disk .................................. 96
Save To Disk ........................................ 98
Rename File/Song .............................. 99
Delete File/Song ................................ 101
■
F7: Utility
■
■
MEMORY BACKUP ...................... 123
MEMORY BACKUP .................. 123
● DISPLAY - MIDI BANK SEL. &
PROG. CHANGE #, TIME ......... 123
RECALL PRESET DATA .............. 123
■
F8: MIDI
■
■
■
LOCAL CONTROL ........................ 124
CLOCK & TRANSPOSE ............... 125
● CLOCK ...................................... 125
● TRANSPOSE ............................ 125
MESSAGE SWITCH ..................... 125
● START/STOP ............................ 125
● EXCLUSIVE .............................. 126
TRANSMIT..................................... 126
●
SPLIT POINT/ABC MODE ............ 110
● SPLIT POINT ............................ 110
● ABC MODE ............................... 110
MULTI PAD ................................... 111
● REPEAT .................................... 111
● CHORD MATCH ....................... 111
●
112
FOOT CONTROLLER ................... 112
● VOLUME ................................... 112
● SW1 (FOOTSWITCH 1) &
SW2 (FOOTSWITCH 2) ............ 112
PANEL CONTROLLER ................. 114
● SUSTAIN BUTTON ................... 114
● PITCH BEND WHEEL ............... 114
● MODULATION WHEEL ............. 114
● INITIAL TOUCH ........................ 115
● AFTER TOUCH ......................... 115
●
●
●
●
●
RECEIVE ....................................... 128
●
●
●
■
■
RECEIVE MONITOR ................. 128
CHANNEL ................................. 128
MODE ....................................... 128
NOTE, CONTROL CHANGE, PROGRAM CHANGE, & PITCH BEND
SWITCH .................................... 128
PANEL CONTROL ........................ 129
●
●
●
OCTAVE ................................... 129
NOTE ........................................ 129
TYPE SELECT & SUB ............. 129
Troubleshooting ............................... 131
Index .................................................... 132
116
118
REVERB TYPE & DEPTH ............ 118
REVERB TYPE ......................... 118
● REVERB PARAMETER EDIT ... 119
● REVERB DEPTH ...................... 119
CHORUS DEPTH ......................... 120
DSP EFFECT TYPE & DEPTH ..... 120
● DSP EFFECT TYPE ................. 120
● DSP EFFECT PARAMETER EDIT . 121
● DSP EFFECT DEPTH ............... 121
●
TRANSMIT MONITOR .............. 126
CHANNEL ................................. 126
PART ......................................... 126
NOTE, CONTROL CHANGE, PROGRAM CHANGE, & PITCH BEND
SWITCH .................................... 127
VOLUME OFFSET .................... 116
VOICE ....................................... 116
REVERB DEPTH ...................... 117
CHORUS DEPTH ...................... 117
F5: Reverb/Chorus/DSP Effect
■
124
SYSTEM .............................................. 124
●
F4: Style Revoice
123
●
●
■
122
HARMONY .................................... 122
REGISTRATION ........................... 122
● NAME ........................................ 122
● FREEZE GROUP SETTING ..... 122
110
F3: Controller
The Drum Kit Edit Mode ................... 95
96
SCALE (ARABIC) .......................... 108
VOICE PART ................................ 108
● SCALE CURVE ......................... 108
● PART TUNE .............................. 109
● OCTAVE ................................... 109
● PAN ........................................... 109
F2: Split Point/ABC Mode/
Multi Pad
The Full Edit Parameters .................. 88
Disk Operations
The [EXIT] Button .......................... 107
F1: Scale (Arabic)/Voice Part 108
The Easy Edit Parameters ............... 85
■
106
General Function Selection &
Editing Procedure ............................ 106
■
E1:BASIC ........................................... 88
■ NAME .............................................. 88
■ WAVE (except for the DRUM KITS) ........... 88
■ TUNE (except for the DRUM KITS) ............ 89
■ VOLUME (except for the DRUM KITS) ...... 89
■ KEY ON DELAY
(except for the DRUM KITS) ...................... 89
■ PAN ................................................. 89
E2:CONTROLLER ............................. 89
■ PITCH BEND WHEEL ..................... 89
■ MODULATION WHEEL .................. 90
■ INITIAL TOUCH CURVE ................. 90
■ AFTER TOUCH ............................... 90
E3:ENVELOPE ................................... 91
■ AMPLITUDE ENVELOPE ............... 91
■ FILTER ............................................ 92
E4:EFFECTS ...................................... 93
■ LFO ................................................. 93
■ DELAY VIB ...................................... 93
■ REVERB DEPTH ............................ 93
■ CHORUS DEPTH ........................... 93
■ DSP EFFECT .................................. 93
■ LEAD EFFECT ................................ 94
STORE/CLEAR .................................. 94
■ STORE ............................................ 94
■ CLEAR CUSTOM VOICE ............... 94
DIRECTORY EDIT ........................ 104
● RENAME ................................... 104
● MAKE ........................................ 104
● DELETE .................................... 105
HD FORMAT ................................. 105
CHECK .......................................... 105
F6: Harmony/Registration
Voice List ............................................ 134
Percussion Kit List .......................... 138
Style List ............................................. 139
Setup Parameters ............................. 140
Fingering Chart ................................. 144
The DSP Effects & Parameters ..... 153
MIDI Implementation Chart ............ 159
MIDI Data Format .............................. 162
Sample Data Disks ........................... 167
Specifications .................................... 168
Taking Care of Your PortaTone
Your PortaTone will give you years of playing pleasure if you follow
the simple rules given below:
■ Location
Do not expose the instrument to the following conditions
to avoid deformation, discoloration, or more serious damage.
● Direct sunlight (e.g. near a window).
● High temperatures (e.g. near a heat source, outside, or
in a car during the daytime).
● Excessive humidity.
● Excessive dust.
● Strong vibration.
■ Power Supply
22
0V
0V
24
130V
● In some areas the PSR-7000 will
have a voltage selector on the bot110V
tom panel. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the AC mains
voltage in your area. The voltage
selector can be set (rotated) by using a screwdriver. If in doubt, contact your Yamaha dealer.
● Turn the power switch OFF when the instrument is not
in use. (The PSR-7000 uses a very small amount of
power to maintain the internal memory contents even
when no batteries are installed and the power is turned
off.)
● The power supply cord should be unplugged from the
AC outlet if the instrument is not to be used for an
extended period of time.
● Unplug the instrument during electric storms.
● Avoid plugging the instrument into the same AC outlet
as appliances with high power consumption, such as
electric heaters or ovens. Also avoid using multi-plug
adapters since these can result in reduced sound
quality, operation errors, and possibly damage.
■ Memory Backup Batteries
The PSR-7000 requires four 1.5 V C size (LR14) batteries
for memory backup power. If no backup batteries are
installed, the memory contents will be lost when then
instrument is unplugged from the AC mains supply. Please
use alkaline batteries. The average life of a set of alkaline
batteries is about 12 months.
1. Open Battery Compartment Cover
Open the battery compartment cover — located on the
instrument’s bottom panel — by pressing on the two
latches on the cover and pulling outward, as shown in
the illustration.
2. Insert Batteries
Insert the four batteries, being careful to follow the
polarity markings on the bottom panel.
3. Replace Cover
Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it
locks firmly in place.
2
NOTES
• Never mix old and new, or different type of batteries!
• To prevent damage due to battery leakage, it is a good idea
to remove the batteries from the PSR-7000 (after saving any
important data to disk) if it is not to be used an extended
period of time. (YAMAHA is not responsible irretrievable
internal data.)
■ Turn Power OFF When Making Connections
● To avoid damage to the instrument and other devices
to which it is connected (a sound system, for example),
turn the power switches of all related devices OFF prior
to connecting or disconnecting audio and MIDI cables.
■ Handling and Transport
● Never apply excessive force to the controls, connectors or other parts of the instrument.
● Always unplug cables by gripping the plug firmly, not by
pulling on the cable.
● Disconnect all cables before moving the instrument.
● Physical shocks caused by dropping, bumping, or
placing heavy objects on the instrument can result in
scratches and more serious damage.
■ Cleaning
● Clean the cabinet and panel with a dry soft cloth.
● A slightly damp cloth may be used to remove stubborn
grime and dirt.
● Never use cleaners such as alcohol or thinner.
● Avoid placing vinyl objects on top of the instrument
(vinyl can stick to and discolor the surface).
■ Electrical Interference
● This instrument contains digital circuitry and may cause
interference if placed too close to radio or television
receivers. If this occurs, move the instrument further
away from the affected equipment.
■ Data Backup
● Save all important data to disk before turning off for
longer periods.
● Internal data (e.g. Registration data) is retained in
memory even if the power switch is turned OFF when
backup batteries are installed as described above. If
you do not intend to use the PSR-7000 for an extended
period of time, it is a good idea to unplug the instrument
from the AC outlet and remove the batteries.
Taking Care of Your PortaTone
● Internal memory data can be corrupted due to incorrect operation. Be sure to “save” important data to a
floppy disk frequently so you have a backup to revert to
if something happens to damage the data in memory.
Also note that magnetic fields can damage data on the
disk, so it is advisable to make a second back-up copy
of disks that contain very important data, and keep
backup disks in a safe place away from stray magnetic
fields (i.e. away from speakers, appliances containing
motors, etc.).
■ Service and Modification
● The PSR-7000 contains no user serviceable parts.
Opening it or tampering with it in anyway can lead to
irreparable damage and possibly electric shock. Refer
all servicing to qualified YAMAHA personnel.
Floppy Disks & the Disk Drive
■ Type of Disk
Use only 3.5-inch 2DD or 2HD floppy disks.
■ Disk Insertion & Removal
● To insert a floppy disk in the disk drive, hold the disk
with the label side facing up and the sliding shutter
facing the disk drive door, then insert carefully until the
disk clicks into place.
● To remove a floppy disk from the disk drive, make sure
the “DISK IN USE” light is not lit and press the disk
eject button firmly as far as it will go and then, when the
disk is full ejected, remove it by hand.
If the eject button is only partially pressed or pressed
too quickly the eject mechanism may not function
properly, leaving the disk stuck halfway. Do not attempt
to remove the disk forcefully if this happens, since
excess force can damage the disk and/or the drive
mechanism. Try either pressing the eject button carefully again, or push the disk all the way back into the
drive and repeat the eject procedure.
ing Disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask your
Yamaha dealer about the available of head-cleaning
disks.
■ Floppy Disk Handling & Storage
The actual recording medium inside a floppy disk has a
fine coating of magnetic particles in which the data is
“stored”. To protect this coating as well as the disk drive’s
delicate read-write head, please observe the following:
● Always keep floppy disks in their case when they are
not in use. Never place heavy objects on a disk or bend
the disk in any way. Also keep disks away from liquids
and dust.
● Never open the disk’s shutter and touch the exposed
surface of the disk.
● Keep floppy disks away from strong magnetic fields
such as those produced by television sets, speakers,
motors, etc.
● Never leave floppy disks in areas exposed to strong
direct sunlight, excessively high or low temperature, or
high humidity.
● Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or
housing.
● Do not attach anything other than the provided labels
to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location.
■ Protecting Your data
● Never attempt to remove a floppy disk during a record
or playback operation!! This can corrupt the data on the
disk, and actually damage the disk drive!
● Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive
before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the
drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and
dirt that can cause data read/write errors.
● To prevent accidental erasure of important data you
have saved to floppy disk, be sure to slide the disk’s
write-protect tab to the “write protect” position (the tab
window should be open). When this is done the disk
cannot be written to.
● Make regular backup copies of important data to a
separate floppy disk, and keep your backup disks in a
separate, safe place.
● To ensure the safety of your data (and of the disk drive
itself) always use floppy disks from a well-known,
reliable manufacturer. “No-brand” disks can cause
trouble.
■ Clean the Read/Write Head Regularly
This instrument employs a precision magnetic read/write
head which, after an extended period of use, will pick up
a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will
eventually cause read and write errors. To maintain the
disk drive in optimum working order we recommend that
you use a commercially-available Dry-type Head Clean-
Write protected
Write enabled
YAMAHA is not responsible for damage caused by improper handling or operation.
YAMAHA provides no guarantee against disk damage.
3
Panel Controls
5
6
0
ACCOMPANIMENT
LEFT ORCHESTRA
ROCK /
ROCK’N’ROLL
ARRANGER
SONG
PLAY
7
LATIN
BALLAD
COUNTRY&
WESTERN
DANCE
MARCH /
WALTZ
SYNTH /
PAD
DISCO
BALLROOM
GUITAR/
PERCUSSIVE
RHYTHM &
BLUES
CUSTOM
STYLE
CUSTOM
VOICE
CHORD
BRASS/
WOODWIND
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
TEMPO
3
MIN •
• MAX
4
8
AUTO BASS CHORD
INTRO/
FILL to
FADE
IN / OUT
A
ENDING/
rit.
MAIN
B
9
A
B
a
3
4
(
5
MIXER
LIST
HOLD
PHRASE/CHORD
PLAYING
PHRASE
2
PHRASE/CHORD
CHORD
6
7
8
r
t
MULTI PAD
s
MAX
DOWN
MIN
MIC
1 POWER Button .......................................... page 8
0 LEFT ORCHESTRA Buttons ............ pages 13, 14
2 DEMO Button ............................................. page 8
! LEFT HOLD Button .................................. page 39
3 MASTER VOLUME Control ........................ page 8
@ SONG PLAY Button ................................. page 53
4 MIC VOLUME Control ................................ page 6
# CUSTOM VOICE EDIT Button ................. page 84
5 ARRANGER Buttons ............................... page 34
$ FUNCTION Button ................................. page 106
PHRASE, PAD, CHORD, BASS, RHYTHM
% SONG RECORD Button .......................... page 58
6 ACCOMPANIMENT Buttons .................... page 26
^ CUSTOM ACCOMP. REC Button ............. page 75
7 ONE TOUCH SETTING Button ................ page 35
& DISK Button ............................................. page 96
8 AUTO BASS CHORD Button ................... page 23
* TEMPO [–] and [+] Buttons ...................... page 26
9 ACCOMPANIMENT DIRECTOR Buttons
( MULTI PAD Buttons ................................. page 42
........................................................ pages 27 – 30
FADE IN/OUT, INTRO/FILL to A/B, MAIN A/B,
ENDING/rit., SYNCHRO START, START/STOP
4
REC/STOP
LEFT
START/STOP
DIGITAL
EQUALIZER
e
PERCUSSION
MODULATION
UP
PHONES
!
1
ACCOMPANIMENT DIRECTOR
PITCH BEND
SYNCHRO
START
LEFT HOLD
w
+
–
RHYTHM
• MAX
DISK
% ^ &
*
BASS
MIN •
)
FUNCTION
SONG
CUSTOM
RECORD ACCOMP. REC
STRINGS /
CHOIR
POP / BEAT
PAD
MIC VOLUME
q
$
CUSTOM
VOICE EDIT
PIANO /
ORGAN
JAZZ
PHRASE
MASTER VOLUME
#
@
REC/STOP, PHRASE/CHORD-PERCUSSION,
1—8
Panel Controls
U
i o p
TOUCH
RESPONSE
SUSTAIN
HARMONY
REVERB
Y
DSP
EFFECT
CHORUS
LCD
CONTRAST
FREEZE
EXIT
u
ACCORDION/
WORLD
TRUMPET/
BRASS
SAX/
WOODWIND
COMBI
1~6
ORGAN FLUTE
ORGAN
R1
STRINGS/
CHOIR
SOUND
EFFECT
STRINGS/
CHOIR
COMBI
7~12
R2
SAX/
WOODWIND
PERCUSSIVE
GUITAR/
BASS
COMBI
13~18
2
1
TRUMPET/
BRASS
DRUM KIT
SYNTH/
PERCUSSIVE
ROTARY
SPEAKER
DEMO
POWER
GUITAR/
BASS
CUSTOM
VOICE
CUSTOM
VOICE
RIGHT 1
RIGHT 2
LEAD
R
y
O
LEAD
PIANO
SYNTH/
PAD
PART SELECT
Q W E
HELP/
LANGUAGE
I
RIGHT ORCHESTRA
MEMORY
SLOW
FAST
SPEED
ORGAN FLUTE
BANK 1~16
–
PSR-7000
DISK IN USE
+
1
2
3
T
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION
P
) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) .................... page 10
E DSP EFFECT Button ............................... page 39
q LCD Buttons ............................................. page 10
R LCD CONTRAST Control ........................ page 11
w DIGITAL EQUALIZER Button ................... page 41
T REGISTRATION Buttons ......................... page 49
e MIXER Button .......................................... page 10
r LIST HOLD Button ................................... page 11
t LCD dials ................................................. page 10
y HELP/LANGUAGE Button ....................... page 11
u EXIT Button ....................................... pages 9, 107
i HARMONY Button ................................... page 37
o SUSTAIN Button ...................................... page 37
p TOUCH RESPONSE Button .................... page 38
Q REVERB Button ....................................... page 38
W CHORUS Button ...................................... page 39
FREEZE, MEMORY, BANK 1~16 [–] and [+],
1—8
Y PART SELECT Buttons ............................ page 14
R1, R2
U RIGHT ORCHESTRA Buttons .......... pages 13, 14
I LEAD Buttons ................................... pages 13, 14
O ORGAN FLUTE Buttons .......................... page 16
P Disk Drive .................................... pages 53, 58, 96
a PITCH BEND Wheel ................................ page 40
s MODULATION Wheel .............................. page 40
5
Connections & Music Stand
AUX OUT
R
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
AVIS: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR.
WARNING:
L/L+R
AUX IN
R
IN
L/L+R
1 2
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
MIDI
OUT
THRU
FOOT SWITCH
5
FOOT VOLUME
3 4
1
AC INLET
2
■ Check the Voltage (Before you connect the AC cord) .........................................................................
In some areas the PSR-7000 will have a voltage selector on the
bottom panel. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the AC
mains voltage in your area. The voltage selector can be set (rotated)
by using a screwdriver. If in doubt, contact your Yamaha dealer.
110V
22
0V
0V
24
130V
■ The PHONES Jack ......................................................................................................................................................................
A standard pair of stereo headphones can be plugged in here for
private practice or late-night playing. The internal stereo speaker
system is automatically shut off when a pair of headphones is plugged
into the PHONES jack.
PHONES
MIC
■ The MIC Jack & MIC VOLUME Control .................................................................................................................
The PSR-7000 includes a microphone (“MIC”) jack into which
just about any standard microphone with a 1/4" phone plug connected
can be plugged (a dynamic microphone with an impedance of 250
ohms is recommended). The microphone sound is amplified and
reproduced via the PSR-7000’s sound system along with the sound of
the internal tone generator. The volume of the microphone sound is
independently controlled by the MIC VOLUME control.
PHONES
MIC
MIC VOLUME
NOTES
• The level of the microphone sound may vary according to the type of
microphone used.
MIN •
• MAX
1 The AUX OUT L/L+R and R Jacks .............................................................................................................................
The rear-panel AUX OUT L/L+R and R jacks deliver the output
of the PSR-7000 for connection to a keyboard amplifier, stereo sound
system, a mixing console, or tape recorder. If you will be connecting
the PSR-7000 to a monaural sound system, use only the L/L+R jack.
When a plug is inserted into the L/L+R jack only, the left- and rightchannel signals are combined and delivered via the L/L+R jack so you
don’t lose any of the PSR-7000 sound.
Stereo System
AUX OUT
R
6
L/L+R
Connections & Music Stand
2 The AUX IN L/L+R and R Jacks ....................................................................................................................................
The rear-panel AUX IN L/L+R and R jacks accept
input from an external instrument or audio souce. The
signal received at the INPUT jack is mixed with PSR-7000
sound and delivered via the speaker system. When a plug
is inserted into the L/L+R jack only, the signal is delivered
via the both channels.
CD Player
AUX IN
R
L/L+R
3 FOOT SWITCH 1 and 2 Jacks .........................................................................................................................................
One or two optional Yamaha FC5 footswitches connected to these jacks can be used to control sustain and a
range of other important functions. Refer to the “FOOT
SWITCH 1” and “FOOT SWITCH 2” functions described
on page 112.
FOOT SWITCH
1
2
4 FOOT VOLUME Jack ................................................................................................................................................................
An optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller can be connected to this jack to allow foot volume (expression)
control. The foot controller can be assigned to control
overall volume or the volume of individual accompaniment and/or voices via the “FOOT VOLUME” function —
page 112.
FOOT VOLUME
5 MIDI IN, THRU and OUT Connectors ......................................................................................................................
The MIDI IN connector receives MIDI data from an
external MIDI device (such as a MIDI sequencer) which
can be used to control the PSR-7000. The MIDI THRU
connector re-transmits any data received at the MIDI IN
connector, allowing “chaining” of several MIDI instruments or other devices. The MIDI OUT connector transmits MIDI data generated by the PSR-7000 (e.g. note and
velocity data produced by playing the keyboard). More
details on MIDI are provided on page 124.
MIDI
IN
OUT
Music
Computer
THRU
Tone Generator
The Music Stand
The PSR-7000 is supplied with a music stand that can
be attached to the instrument by inserting it into the holes
at the rear of the speaker panel.
7
The Demonstration
To give you an idea of the PSR-7000’s sophisticated capabilities, it
is programmed with 14 demonstration sequences which can be played
in a number of ways.
Z Switch ON ............................................................................................................................................................................................
Plug the AC power cord into a convenient AC
outlet, then press the [POWER] button to turn the
PSR-7000 ON.
DEMO
POWER
X Set an Initial Volume Level ................................................................................................................................................
Set the [MASTER VOLUME] control to a
position about a quarter of the way toward the
highest setting. You can re-adjust the [MASTER
VOLUME] control for the most comfortable overall volume level after playback begins.
MASTER VOLUME
MIN •
• MAX
C Press the [DEMO] Button ...................................................................................................................................................
Press the [DEMO] button and the PSR-7000
demo display will appear.
DEMO
POWER
V Start & Stop Playback as Required
Press the START LCD button to start playback of
all demo songs. Press the STOP LCD button when
you want to stop playback.
B Exit When Done ..........................................................................................................
Press either the [DEMO] button or the [EXIT]
button to exit from the demo mode and return to the
normal play-mode display when you’ve finished
playing the demo songs.
8
DEMO
EXIT
The Demonstration
The Random & Single Demo Play Modes
If you play the demo as described above, you’ll hear all 14 demo songs played in random order. By selecting
an appropriate play mode you can also play back all the songs sequence, or play a single specified song.
Z Select a Play Mode ....................................................................................................................................................................
Use either of the LCD dials under MODE on the
display to select one of the available play modes.
ALL
All 14 demo songs are played
back in sequence.
RANDOM
All 14 demo songs are played back
in random order. This is the default
mode.
SINGLE SONG
Only the selected song is played.
X Select a Song .........................................................
Press the LCD button corresponding to the type
of demo song you want to play, then use the same
LCD button to select either of the two demo songs in
that group. You can also use either of the LCD dials
under SONG on the display to select any of the 14
demo songs.
C Turn the Repeat Mode ON or OFF .............................................................................................................................
Use the REPEAT LCD dial to turn repeat playback ON or OFF as required (when ON, the selected
song or sequence of songs will be repeated until the
STOP LCD button is pressed)
V Start & Stop Playback as Required .........................................................................................................................
Press the START LCD button to start playback of
the selected demo song(s). Press the STOP LCD
button when you want to stop playback.
B Exit When Done ............................................................................................................................................................................
Press either the [DEMO] button or the [EXIT]
button to exit from the demo mode and return to the
normal play-mode display when you’ve finished
playing the demo songs.
DEMO
EXIT
9
The PSR-7000 Display & Display-based Controls
The Display & Multi-function Controls
The PSR-7000 makes general operation and programming easier than ever with a large backlit LCD display
panel and multi-function controls. The 8 LCD selectors
— four on either side of the display panel — and 8 LCD
dials below the display perform the function indicated by
the adjacent section of the display. In the example display
shown here, for example, the LCD dial immediately
below LEAD on the display can be used to adjust the
volume of the LEAD voice. Rotate the dial upward to
increase the volume, or rotate the dial downward to
decrease the volume. In the same way, the LCD button
immediately to the right of LEAD on the display is used
to set the normal octave for the lead voice (“0”), shift it
one octave up (“+1”), or one octave down (“–1”).
■
The [MIXER] Button ..................................................................................................................................................................
The lower section of the normal play mode
display, shown above, provides individual volume
controls for the PSR-7000’s song, multi pad, accompaniment, left, right 1, right 2, lead, and organ
sound. Pressing the ACCOMP. VOLUME LCD
button switches to the individual auto-accompaniment part volume controls: rhythm 1, rhythm 2,
bass, chord 1, chord 2, pad, phrase 1, and phrase 2.
This is essentially a “mixer” that you will use the
achieve the best overall balance for your musical
needs. The mixer controls will disappear when functions which have different displays are selected, but
can be instantly recalled without exiting from the
current display mode by pressing the [MIXER]
button. Pressing the [MIXER] button a second time
(or the [EXIT] button) causes the mixer controls to
disappear.
10
DIGITAL
EQUALIZER
MIXER
LIST
HOLD
The PSR-7000 Display & Display-based Controls
■
The [LIST HOLD] Button ......................................................................................................................................................
When selecting voices (page 14) or accompaniment styles (page 26), or using the ONE TOUCH
SETTING feature (page 35), the voice, style, or
ONE TOUCH SETTING list will appear on the
display, but will automatically disappear after a few
seconds if no selections are made. The list can be
kept on the display for as long as required by
pressing the [LIST HOLD] button so that its LED
lights. Press [LIST HOLD] a second time (the LED
will go out) to disengage the list hold function.
DIGITAL
EQUALIZER
MIXER
NOTES
LIST
HOLD
• If the [LIST HOLD] button is engaged when a list is not
showing, the list will not appear even when a voice group,
style group, or ONE TOUCH SETTING button is pressed.
■
The [LCD CONTRAST] Control .....................................................................................................................................
The PSR-7000 display panel is a liquid-crystal
type which features a [LCD CONTRAST] control.
Use the [LCD CONTRAST] control to set the
display for optimum legibility.
■
LCD
CONTRAST
The 5-language Help Function .....................................................................................................................................
To make operation as smooth and easy as possible, the PSR-7000 provides “on-line help” for most
features and functions.
Press the [HELP/LANGUAGE] button to see
help text for the current display, or press any other
panel button after pressing the [HELP/LANGUAGE]
button to see help text for that button. Press the
[EXIT] or [HELP/LANGUAGE] button when you’re
ready to exit from the help mode. If more than one
page of help text is available for the selected topic,
use the LCD buttons to the right of the display to
switch pages as necessary.
Help text and screen messages are available in
five languages: English, German, French, Spanish,
and Italian. Use the LCD dials in the help display to
select the desired language.
HELP/
LANGUAGE
EXIT
11
Playing the PSR-7000
■ Before You Begin
DEMO
Before playing your PSR-7000 for the first
time, it might be a good idea to re-initialize it to
the original factory settings just in case these have
been changed at some point before you receive
the instrument. To do this, turn the [POWER]
switch ON while holding the [DEMO] and [EXIT]
buttons.
POWER
EXIT
When the display shown to the right appears
press the OK LCD button.
• When the above initialization procedure is carried
out, all internal data (e.g. REGISTRATION, CUSTOM STYLE, CUSTOM VOICE, MULTI PAD) will
also be initialized and therefore lost!
Selecting & Playing Voices
The PSR-7000 allows you to individually select and play up to four “orchestra parts” at the same time in a number
of ways. A range of voices can be assigned to each orchestra part. There’s also an “ORGAN FLUTE” part which
simulates an extremely wide range of organ sounds — complete with realistic rotary speaker effect.
RIGHT ORCHESTRA 1
RIGHT ORCHESTRA 2
Both the RIGHT 1 and RIGHT 2 voices are polyphonic voices which can be played over
the entire keyboard or to the right of a specified split point. The default split point is the F#2
key. Either voice can be played alone, or both can be played simultaneously. The RIGHT 1
and RIGHT 2 voices can be selected from a range of 246+8 (Drum kit) voices organized in
12 groups.
LEAD
This is a monophonic voice which can be played over the entire keyboard or to the right of
a specified split point. The default split point is the F#2 key. The LEAD voice can be played
alone, or simultaneously with either or both of the RIGHT ORCHESTRA voices. The LEAD
voice can be selected from a range of 123 voices organized in 6 groups.
When only the LEAD voice is being played it has “last note priority”. That is, only the last
note played will sound. When the LEAD voice is being played with a RIGHT ORCHESTRA
voice it has “highest note priority” — the highest note is played by the LEAD voice.
LEFT ORCHESTRA
A polyphonic voice which can be played to the left of a specified split point while the
RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, and/or LEAD voices are played to the right of the split point. The default split point is the F#2 key. The LEFT voice can be selected from a range of 205 voices
organized in 6 groups.
ORGAN FLUTE
This is a polyphonic voice which can be played over the entire keyboard or to the right of a
specified split point. The default split point is the F#2 key. The ORGAN FLUTE voice cannot be played simultaneously with the RIGHT or LEAD voices. Details on using the ORGAN FLUTE voices are provided on page 16.
* Voice numbers include Custom Voice.
12
Playing the PSR-7000
Z Set Initial Volume Levels .....................................................................................................................................................
Set the [MASTER VOLUME] control to an
appropriate level, and make sure that the LEFT, R1,
R2, LEAD and ORGAN volume levels in the MIXER
MAIN VOLUME display are set to their maximum
“100” levels (use the corresponding LCD dials to set
these volume levels if necessary). You can set the
[MASTER VOLUME] control for the most comfortable overall volume level after beginning to play.
MASTER VOLUME
MIN •
• MAX
NOTES
• No sound will be produced if all volume levels other than
the [MASTER VOLUME] control are set to their minimum
values.
X Select the Orchestra Parts You Want To Play ................................................................................................
Press the [RIGHT 1], [RIGHT 2], [LEAD], and/or [LEFT] button(s), turning on the
indicators corresponding to the parts you want to play. Press the [ORGAN FLUTE] button to
play the ORGAN FLUTE voice. The RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, and LEAD voices will automatically
be turned off when the ORGAN FLUTE voice is selected. The ORGAN FLUTE voice will
automatically be turned off when the RIGHT 1 , RIGHT 2 or LEAD voice is turned on.
Each time you turn a part on or off, the EASY SETTING LCD button for that part will appear
on the LCD for a few seconds.
LEFT ORCHESTRA
RIGHT ORCHESTRA
PIANO /
ORGAN
STRINGS /
CHOIR
PIANO
TRUMPET/
BRASS
ORGAN
SYNTH/
PAD
SAX/
WOODWIND
COMBI
1~6
ORGAN FLUTE
BRASS/
WOODWIND
R1
STRINGS/
CHOIR
SOUND
EFFECT
STRINGS/
CHOIR
COMBI
7~12
SYNTH /
PAD
R2
SAX/
WOODWIND
PERCUSSIVE
GUITAR/
BASS
COMBI
13~18
TRUMPET/
BRASS
DRUM KIT
SYNTH/
PERCUSSIVE
ROTARY
SPEAKER
CUSTOM
VOICE
GUITAR/
BASS
CUSTOM
VOICE
CUSTOM
VOICE
LEFT
RIGHT 1
RIGHT 2
LEAD
GUITAR/
PERCUSSIVE
LEFT HOLD
PART SELECT
LEAD
ACCORDION/
WORLD
SLOW
FAST
SPEED
ORGAN FLUTE
13
Playing the PSR-7000
If you press the EASY SETTING LCD button
before it disappears, the easy-setting display for that
part will appear providing access to the split point
parameters as well as the individual octave, pan, and
tune parameters for that part. These same parameters can be accessed via the FUNCTION displays
(page 106), but the easy-setting displays offer an
easier, more efficient way to set these parameters
when selecting parts. The easy setting display for a
part that is already on can be accessed by pressing
the EASY SETTING LCD button while holding the
corresponding part button (in this case the part
button indicator will not go out when the button is
released). See the following pages for details on
each of the orchestra part easy setting parameters:
NOTES
• The more parts you play simultaneously, the fewer the
total number of notes that can be played on the keyboard
at the same time.
• When the RIGHT 1 and RIGHT 2 parts are both on and the
same voice is selected for both parts, the sound may be
slightly different from the normal voice.
• When the LEFT part is on, the left voice will automatically
be transposed up one octave.
SPLIT POINT [L]
Page 20
SPLIT POINT [A]
Page 31
OCTAVE
Page 109
PAN
Page 109
TUNE
Page 109
C Select a Voice or Voices ........................................................................................................................................................
To select a RIGHT 1 or RIGHT 2 voice use the RIGHT ORCHESTRA voice selectors, to select a LEAD
voice use the LEAD voice selectors, to select an ORGAN FLUTE voice use the ORGAN FLUTE voice
selectors ([COMBI 1-6], [COMBI 7-12], or [COMBI 13-18]), and to select a LEFT voice use the LEFT
ORCHESTRA voice selectors.
When selecting a RIGHT 1 or RIGHT 2 voice it is also necessary to press the [R1] or [R2] PART SELECT
button prior to actually selecting the voice, according to whether you want to select a RIGHT 1 or RIGHT
2 voice (this is not necessary if the [R1] or [R2] indicator for the part you want to select is already lit).
Use the voice group buttons to select the group from which you want to select a voice. The corresponding
voice display will appear.
NOTES
• The display will automatically revert to the main display
after a few seconds if the [LIST HOLD] button is not
engaged (page 11).
• Custom voices which can be selected via the RIGHT
ORCHESTRA, LEFT ORCHESTRA, and LEAD [CUSTOM] buttons can be created via the CUSTOM VOICE
EDIT mode described on page 84, or loaded from disk.
14
Playing the PSR-7000
LEFT ORCHESTRA
RIGHT ORCHESTRA
PIANO /
ORGAN
STRINGS /
CHOIR
PART SELECT
PIANO
TRUMPET/
BRASS
ORGAN
SYNTH/
PAD
SAX/
WOODWIND
COMBI
1~6
ORGAN FLUTE
BRASS/
WOODWIND
R1
STRINGS/
CHOIR
SOUND
EFFECT
STRINGS/
CHOIR
COMBI
7~12
SYNTH /
PAD
R2
SAX/
WOODWIND
PERCUSSIVE
GUITAR/
BASS
COMBI
13~18
TRUMPET/
BRASS
DRUM KIT
SYNTH/
PERCUSSIVE
ROTARY
SPEAKER
CUSTOM
VOICE
GUITAR/
BASS
CUSTOM
VOICE
CUSTOM
VOICE
LEFT
RIGHT 1
RIGHT 2
LEAD
GUITAR/
PERCUSSIVE
LEFT HOLD
LEAD
ACCORDION/
WORLD
SLOW
FAST
SPEED
ORGAN FLUTE
Use the page-number LCD dials the select the
page containing the voice you want if more than one
page is available, then press the LCD button corresponding to the desired voice. You can also use
either of the SELECT LCD dials to select any of the
voices within the selected group.
V Play & Adjust Volume ..............................................................................................................................................................
You can now play the selected voice or voices on
the keyboard. Use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the overall volume level, and the
MIXER MAIN VOLUME LCD dials to set the
desired balance between the parts.
15
Playing the PSR-7000
Using the Organ Flute Voices
The PSR-7000 has 18 preset ORGAN FLUTE voices
which can be selected in the same way as the RIGHT,
LEAD and LEFT voices: press an ORGAN FLUTE voice
group button — [COMBI 1-6], [COMBI 7-12], or [COMBI
13-18] — and then press the LCD button corresponding
to the desired voice in the selected group. The main
difference between the ORGAN FLUTE voices and others is that the ORGAN FLUTE voices can be directly
edited via the voice list display. The editing controls
appear below the voice list (turn [LIST HOLD] on to
keep the voice list and editing controls on the display).
■
COMBI
1~6
COMBI
7~12
COMBI
13~18
ROTARY
SPEAKER
SLOW
FAST
SPEED
ORGAN FLUTE
FOOTAGE .............................................................................................................................................................................................
The basic sound of the currently selected ORGAN FLUTE voice is edited via FOOTAGE bars
corresponding to the LCD dials. If the FOOTAGE
display is not showing, press the FOOTAGE LCD
button in the ORGAN FLUTE voice list display.
The term “FOOTAGE” is a reference to the fact that
the sound of pipe organs was adjusted via “stops”
which turned on or off pipes of different lengths (in
feet). The longer the pipe, the lower the pitch of the
sound, thus the 16' (16-foot) FOOTAGE bar adjusts
the volume of the lowest pitched component of the
voice while the 1' bar adjusts the highest-pitched
component of the voice. Use the LCD dials to
increase or reduce the amount of the corresponding
footages to create the desired overall sound. The
longer a graphic footage bar, the greater the amount
of the corresponding footage added to the sound.
16
ORGAN FLUTE
Playing the PSR-7000
■
VOLUME & ATTACK ..................................................................................................................................................................
To access the VOLUME and ATTACK parameters for the ORGAN FLUTE voices, press the
VOLUME/ATTACK LCD button from the FOOTAGE display.
The VOLUME control adjusts the overall volume of the current ORGAN FLUTE voice. The
longer the graphic bar, the greater the volume.
The ATTACK controls adjust the attack sound of
the current ORGAN FLUTE voice. The 4', 2 2/3'
and 2' controls increase or reduce the amount of
attack sound at the corresponding footages. The
longer the graphic bar the greater the attack sound.
The LENGTH control produces a longer or shorter
decay after the initial attack. The longer the graphic
bar the longer the decay. The MODE control selects
the FIRST or EACH attack mode: in the FIRST
mode attack will only be applied to the first note in
a chord or group of notes played and held simultaneously; in the EACH mode attack will be applied
equally to all notes. The RESP control increases or
decreases the length of attack and release on voices
based on the FOOTAGE controls. The higher the
value the longer the attack and release.
■
NAME & ROTARY SPEAKER ...........................................................................................................................................
To access the NAME and ROTARY SPEAKER
parameters for the ORGAN FLUTE voices, press
the NAME/ROTARY SP. LCD button from the
FOOTAGE display.
The NAME controls can be used to enter an
original name for the current ORGAN FLUTE voice.
Voice names can be up to 12 characters long. Use the
< > LCD dials to move the name cursor to the
various character positions, then use the A~Z, a~z
or 0~9… LCD dial to select the required character
for each position. The A~Z LCD dial selects capital
letters, the a~z LCD dial selects lower-case letters,
and the 0~9… LCD dial selects numbers and
special characters.
17
Playing the PSR-7000
The ROTARY SPEAKER controls set up the
rotary speaker effect for the current ORGAN FLUTE
voice. The TYPE control selected one of 5 different
rotary speaker types. The SPEED control sets the
speed of the rotary speaker effect when the FAST
mode is selected: the greater the value the faster the
speed. The RATE control sets the rate of variation
between the FAST and SLOW modes: the greater
the value the faster the rate of change when the
FAST or SLOW rotary speaker mode is selected.
The DEPTH control sets the depth of the rotary
speaker effect: the higher the value the more pronounced the effect.
NOTES
• All of the above parameters can be individually programmed for each ORGAN FLUTE voice. The settings
are retained in memory even when the power is turned off
as long as a good set of backup batteries is present in the
PSR-7000 (page 2).
• The ORGAN FLUTE settings can be saved to disk and
recalled when needed via the SAVE TO DISK and LOAD
FROM DISK functions described on pages 96 and 98.
• The original factory settings can be recalled via the
RECALL PRESET DATA function described on page 123.
■
Using the Rotary Speaker Effect ................................................................................................................................
When the ORGAN FLUTE voice is selected,
press the [ROTARY SPEAKER] button so that its
indicator lights to engage the ROTARY SPEAKER
effect. Press the [ROTARY SPEAKER] button
again to turn the effect off. The [SPEED] button
alternately switches between the slow and fast speeds.
The current speed is indicated by the SLOW and
FAST indicators next to the [SPEED] button.
18
ORGAN FLUTE
COMBI
1~6
COMBI
7~12
COMBI
13~18
ROTARY
SPEAKER
SLOW
FAST
SPEED
ORGAN FLUTE
Playing the PSR-7000
Keyboard Percussion
When one of the RIGHT ORCHESTRA [DRUM KIT]
voices is selected, you can play 61 different drums and
percussion instruments on the keyboard. The drums and
percussion instruments played by the various keys are
marked by symbols above the keys. Some of the instruments in the different drum kit voices sound different
even though they have the same name, while others are
essentially the same.
NOTES
• When the DRUM KIT voice OCTAVE parameter is set to “–1”, 11
different instruments are available in the lowest octave.
• The Transpose, Tune, Sustain, Harmony, Left Hold, and Modulation functions do not affect the DRUM KIT voices.
• The pitch bend wheel can be used to bend the pitch of the
keyboard percussion voices to create unique musical effects,
but it has little effect on some percussion sounds.
• See page 138 for a complete listing of the keyboard percussion
drum instrument assignments.
19
Playing the PSR-7000
Changing the “L” Split Point
The PSR-7000 has two programmable split points — one which divides the LEFT and RIGHT/LEAD/ORGAN
FLUTE orchestra parts, and one which divides the auto-accompaniment and manual sections of the keyboard when
AUTO BASS CHORD accompaniment (page 31) is engaged. In the split point displays accessed by the EASY
SETTING LCD button described below, and the FUNCTION displays (page 110), the former is indicated by the “L”
marker and the latter by the “A” marker above the graphic keyboard. The current split points are indicated on the
display both by the split markers and the “splits” in the graphic keyboard. We’ll look at the ABC (“A”) split point
in more detail in “Using the Accompaniment Section”, page 31. For now, here’s how you can change the “L” split
point via the orchestra part easy-setting displays to suit your own playing requirements.
Z Select an Orchestra Part Easy Setting Display ..........................................................................................
Select an orchestra part easy-setting display either by turning a part on or off and pressing the
EASY SETTING LCD button before it disappears,
or by pressing the EASY SETTING LCD button
while holding an orchestra part button that is already
on.
X Set the Split Point .......................................................................................................................................................................
The split point can be set in two ways: either use
the SPLIT POINT L LCD dials, or press the desired
key on the keyboard while holding the L DIRECT
SETTING LCD button. The new split point will be
indicated on the graphic keyboard in the LCD.
NOTES
• The “L” split point cannot be set lower than the “A” split
point.
• When the “L” and “A” split points are set at different keys,
the LEFT voice can be played between the “A” and “L” split
points when the AUTO BASS CHORD function on. When
the “L” and “A” split points are set to the same key, the
LEFT voice can be played anywhere to the left of the “L”
and “A” split points.
C Return to the Previous Display
When Done .......................................
Press the EXIT LCD button or [EXIT] panel
button to return to the previous display when done.
20
Press a key while holding the
L DIRECT SETTING LCD button.
Transposition, Tuning,
& Octave Change
The most important and fundamental adjustment for any musical
instrument is tuning. The TRANSPOSE, TUNING, and OCTAVE
CHANGE functions described below let you control the pitch of the
PSR-7000 in a number of ways.
TRANSPOSE & TUNE
These functions allow the overall pitch of the PSR-7000 to be transposed up or down in semitone steps, and finetuned in 0.2 Hertz steps.
Z Press the TRANSPOSE/TUNE LCD Button .....................................................................................................
Select the transpose and tune functions from the
normal play mode display by pressing the TRANSPOSE/TUNE LCD button.
X Set the Transposition and/or Tuning As Required ...................................................................................
Use the TRANSPOSE LCD dials to set the desired degree of transposition, and the TUNE LCD
dials to set the desired degree of tuning.
The transpose range is from –24 to +24, allowing a maximum upward or downward transposition
of 2 octaves. A setting of “0” produces the normal
pitch.
The tuning range is from 414.6 Hertz to 466.8
Hertz, adjustable in 0.2-Hertz steps. A3 = 440.0
Hertz is “normal” pitch.
C Return to the Main Display When Done ..............................................................................................................
Press the MAIN VOLUME LCD button to exit
from the transpose and tune functions and return to
the main display.
21
Transposition, Tuning, & Octave Change
OCTAVE CHANGE
This function allows the LEFT, RIGHT 1, RIGHT2, LEAD, and ORGAN FLUTE voices to be independently
transposed up or down by one octave.
The LEFT, R1, R2, LEAD, and ORGAN LCD buttons
directly set the octave of the corresponding voice. Pressing one of these buttons changes the corresponding octave setting to “+1”, “–1”, and then “0”, in sequence.
“+1” shifts the voice up one octave “–1” shifts the voice
down one octave, and “0” sets the voice to its normal
octave.
NOTES
• These parameters are also available in the F1 VOICE PART
function display — page 109.
• Some voices may suddenly shift octaves when played at the
extreme ends of the keyboard if they are set to a lower or higher
octave than normal. This can also occur when the PITCH BEND
wheel is used on extremely low or high notes.
• If you change the transpose, octave change, or tuning settings
while playing one or more notes on the keyboard, the new octave
change settings will take effect from the next notes played while
tune and transpose settings take effect immediately.
22
Using the Accompaniment Section
The PSR-7000 has 120 different preset accompaniment “styles”
and up to 32 custom accompaniment styles that can be used to provide fully-orchestrated or rhythm-only accompaniment. The PSR7000’s sophisticated Auto Bass Chord accompaniment system can
provide automated bass and chord backing that is perfectly matched
to the selected accompaniment style.
Z Turn ABC ON ....................................................................................................................................................................................
Press the [AUTO BASS CHORD] button so that
its indicator lights, thereby turning the ABC mode
on.
ACCOMPANIMENT
ROCK /
ROCK’N’ROLL
JAZZ
POP / BEAT
LATIN
BALLAD
COUNTRY&
WESTERN
DANCE
MARCH /
WALTZ
DISCO
BALLROOM
RHYTHM &
BLUES
CUSTOM
STYLE
NOTES
• Rhythm-only accompaniment will be produced if you don’t
turn the [AUTO BASS CHORD] button on.
• The maximum number of notes that can be played simultaneously on the PSR-7000 keyboard is reduced when
the Auto Bass Chord feature is used.
• The PSR-7000 employs “last-note priority”, which means
that when the number of notes played on the keyboard
exceeds the total number that can be produced by the
PSR-7000 at that time, the last notes played take priority.
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
AUTO BASS CHORD
X Select the Desired ABC Mode .......................................................................................................................................
Press the ABC EASY SETTING LCD button
immediately after pressing the [AUTO BASS
CHORD] button to select the ABC MODE and
SPLIT POINT display. Use the ABC MODE LCD
dials to select the SINGLE FINGER, FINGERED 1,
FINGERED 2, FULL KEYBOARD, AUTO MIDI
BASS, or MANUAL MIDI BASS mode. If you
select the MANUAL MIDI BASS mode, and press
the BASS VOICE LCD button which appears, you
can use the GROUP LCD dials to specify the bass
voice to be used. Press the ABC MODE LCD button
to return to the ABC MODE display as required.
Press the EXIT LCD button or [EXIT] panel
button to return to the main display when done.
The SINGLE FINGER, FINGERED 1, FINGERED 2, FULL KEYBOARD, AUTO MIDI BASS
and MANUAL MIDI BASS modes function as
follows:
23
Using the Accompaniment Section
● SINGLE FINGER (SF)
Single-finger accompaniment makes it simple to
produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment
using major, seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords
by pressing a minimum number of keys on the lefthand section of the keyboard. The abbreviated chord
fingerings described below are used:
C
G
F
Cm
C7
Cm 7
■ For a major chord, press the root key only.
■ For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root
key and a black key to its left.
■ For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root
key and a white key to its left.
■ For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press
the root key and both a white and black key to its
left.
● FINGERED 1 (FC1)
This is the default ABC mode. The FINGERED
1 mode lets you finger your own chords on the ABC
section of the keyboard (i.e. all keys to the left of and
including the split-point key — normally F#2),
while the PSR-7000 supplies appropriately orchestrated rhythm, bass, and chord accompaniment in
the selected style.
The FINGERED 1 mode will accept the 34 chord
types.
● FINGERED 2 (FC2)
This mode accepts the same fingerings as the
FINGERED 1 mode, but the lowest note played in
the ABC section of the keyboard is used as the bass
root, allowing you to play “on bass” or “fraction”
chords (in the FINGERED 1 mode the root of the
chord is always used as the bass root).
24
Using the Accompaniment Section
● FULL KEYBOARD
When this advanced auto-accompaniment mode
is engaged the PSR-7000 will automatically create
appropriate accompaniment while you play just
about anything, anywhere on the keyboard: chords,
a bass line, arpeggiated chords, a melody line. The
name of the detected chord will appear on the
display. You don’t have to worry about specifying
the accompaniment chords. Although the FULL
KEYBOARD mode is designed to work with many
songs, some arrangements may not be suitable for
use with this feature. Try playing a few simple songs
in the FULL KEYBOARD mode to get a feel for its
capabilities.
NOTES
• Chord detection occurs at approximately 8th-note intervals. Extremely short chords — less than an 8th note in
length — may therefore not be detected.
● AUTO MIDI BASS
In this mode all accompaniment parts except the
bass part respond to the chord played on the keyboard. Fingering is the same as in the FINGERED 1
mode. If more than three notes are played on the
ABC section of the keyboard in this mode, and if the
chord played is not recognized by the PSR-7000,
only the top three are used for chord recognition. All
others are ignored. The bass part is determined by
the note played on an external MIDI bass keyboard
connected to the MIDI IN terminal and assigned to
the MIDI Bass channel (page 128).
● MANUAL MIDI BASS
In this no chord recognition occurs. All accompaniment parts other than the rhythm part are muted,
and a MIDI bass keyboard connected to the MIDI IN
connector and assigned to the MIDI Bass channel
(page 128) directly plays the bass voice selected via
the BASS VOICE parameter that appears when the
MANUAL MIDI BASS mode is selected in the ABC
easy-setting display.
25
Using the Accompaniment Section
C Select a Style ...................................................................................................................................................................................
ACCOMPANIMENT
The PSR-7000 has 120 preset styles organized in
11 groups (see the “Style List” on page 130).
Use the ACCOMPANIMENT group buttons to
select the group from which you want to select a
style. The corresponding style display will appear.
ROCK /
ROCK’N’ROLL
JAZZ
POP / BEAT
LATIN
BALLAD
COUNTRY&
WESTERN
DANCE
MARCH /
WALTZ
DISCO
BALLROOM
RHYTHM &
BLUES
CUSTOM
STYLE
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
NOTES
• The display will automatically revert to the main display
after a few seconds if the [LIST HOLD] button is not
engaged (page 11).
AUTO BASS CHORD
• For easy selection some styles are repeated in different
groups.
• Custom styles which can be selected via the ACCOMPANIMENT [CUSTOM] button can be created via the CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT RECORD mode described on
page 75, or loaded from disk.
Use the page-number LCD dials to select the
page containing the style you want if more than one
page is available, then press the LCD button corresponding to the desired style. You can also use either
of the SELECT LCD dials to select any of the styles
within the selected group.
The PSR-7000 automatically determines the voices
to be used for the accompaniment bass and chords
according the accompaniment style you select.
NOTES
• Also see “Custom Accompaniment” on page 75.
• The custom style button can be used to access the styles
on optional SFF (Style File Format) disks.
V Set the Tempo .................................................................................................................................................................................
When you select a different style while the accompaniment is not playing, the “default” tempo for
that style is also selected, and the tempo is displayed
on the display in quarter-note beats per minute. If
the accompaniment is playing, the same tempo is
maintained even if you select a different style.
You can change the tempo to any value between
32 and 280 beats per minute, however, by using the
TEMPO [–] and [+] buttons. This can be done either
before the accompaniment is started or while it is
playing. To use the [–] and [+] buttons, press either
button briefly to decrement or increment the tempo
value by one, or hold the button for continuous
decrementing or incrementing.
NOTES
• The default tempo for the selected style can be recalled at
any time by pressing both the TEMPO [–] and [+] buttons
simultaneously.
26
TEMPO
–
Tempo
+
Using the Accompaniment Section
B Start the Accompaniment ..................................................................................................................................................
There are several ways to start the accompaniment:
● Straight start: Press the [START/STOP] button. If you press the [START/STOP] button, the
rhythm will begin playing immediately without
bass and chord accompaniment.
INTRO/
FILL to
FADE
IN / OUT
A
ENDING/
rit.
MAIN
B
A
SYNCHRO
START
START/STOP
SYNCHRO
START
START/STOP
SYNCHRO
START
START/STOP
SYNCHRO
START
START/STOP
B
ACCOMPANIMENT DIRECTOR
NOTES
• It is also possible to select one of the several variations
available prior to a straight start — refer to “7. Select
Variations as Required,” below.
● Start with an introduction followed by the
MAIN A variation: press the [INTRO A/FILL
to A] button.
INTRO/
FILL to
FADE
IN / OUT
A
ENDING/
rit.
MAIN
B
A
B
ACCOMPANIMENT DIRECTOR
● Start with an introduction followed by the
MAIN B variation: press the [INTRO B/FILL
to B] button.
● Synchronized start: Any of the above start
types can be synchronized to the first note or
chord played on the ABC section of the keyboard
(i.e. keys to the left of and including the splitpoint key — normally F#2) by first pressing the
[SYNCHRO START] button. Pressing the
[SYNCHRO START] button alone causes a
straight start to occur when the first note or chord
is played. Press [SYNCHRO START] and the
appropriate INTRO button (or vice-versa) for a
synchronized introduction start. The first dot of
the TEMPO display will flash at the current
tempo when a synchronized start mode has been
selected.
INTRO/
FILL to
FADE
IN / OUT
A
ENDING/
rit.
MAIN
B
A
B
ACCOMPANIMENT DIRECTOR
INTRO/
FILL to
FADE
IN / OUT
A
ENDING/
rit.
MAIN
B
A
B
ACCOMPANIMENT DIRECTOR
NOTES
• If you press the [SYNCHRO START] button while the
accompaniment is playing, the accompaniment will stop
and the synchro start mode will be engaged.
• The four LED dots of the TEMPO display provide a visual
indication of the selected tempo as shown to the left.
• A Yamaha FC5 footswitch plugged into a rear panel
FOOT SWITCH jack can also be used to start the accompaniment if the appropriate function is assigned to the
footswitch using the FOOT SWITCH functions described
on page 112.
4/4 Time
TEMPO
3/4 Time
TEMPO
1st Beat
2nd Beat
3rd Beat
4th Beat
27
Using the Accompaniment Section
N Play On the ABC Section Of the Keyboard .....................................................................................................
As soon as you play any chord that the PSR-7000
can “recognize” on the ABC section of the keyboard
in one of the FINGERED modes or the AUTO MIDI
BASS (see fingering chart on page 144), an abbreviated chord in the SINGLE FINGER mode, or just
about anything anywhere on the keyboard in the
FULL KEYBOARD mode, the PSR-7000 will automatically begin to play the chord along with the
selected rhythm and an appropriate bass line. The
accompaniment will continue playing even if you
release the left-hand keys.
If the MANUAL MIDI BASS mode is selected
only the rhythm accompaniment will play automatically, and selected bass voice can be played via a
MIDI bass keyboard.
Split Point
▼
ABC Section
C3
Melody Section
NOTES
• The appropriate chord and bass note will sound if you play
in the ABC section of the keyboard while the ABC function
is on but the accompaniment is stopped (but not in the
FULL KEYBOARD and MANUAL MIDI BASS modes).
Please note that the Left Hold function (page 39) cannot
be applied to these chord and bass notes.
M Select Sections as Required ...........................................................................................................................................
Each accompaniment style has two sections:
MAIN A and MAIN B. There is also an ENDING
section which is described in step >. The INTRO A
and B sections can be used to start the accompaniment as described in the preceding step. The MAIN
A and B sections can be selected manually by
pressing the corresponding section button.
NOTES
• Some INTRO and ENDING sections have their own chord
progressions which play in the current accompaniment
key — the current chord is shown below the style name in
the LCD display.
28
INTRO/
FILL to
FADE
IN / OUT
A
ENDING/
rit.
MAIN
B
A
B
ACCOMPANIMENT DIRECTOR
SYNCHRO
START
START/STOP
Using the Accompaniment Section
< Use Fill-ins ..........................................................................................................................................................................................
The PSR-7000 provides two types of automatic
breaks or “fill-ins.”
● FILL to A: Press the [INTRO A/FILL to A]
button to produce a fill and go (or return) to the
MAIN A section.
INTRO/
FILL to
FADE
IN / OUT
A
ENDING/
rit.
MAIN
B
A
SYNCHRO
START
START/STOP
SYNCHRO
START
START/STOP
B
ACCOMPANIMENT DIRECTOR
● FILL to B: Press the [INTRO B/FILL to B]
button to produce a fill and then go (or return) to
the MAIN B section.
INTRO/
FILL to
FADE
IN / OUT
A
ENDING/
rit.
MAIN
B
A
B
ACCOMPANIMENT DIRECTOR
It is possible to change the section that will play
after the fill-in by pressing the appropriate section
button while the fill-in is playing.
NOTES
• A Yamaha FC5 footswitch plugged into a rear panel
FOOT SWITCH jack can also be used to activate the intro
and fill-in functions if the appropriate function is assigned
to the footswitch using the FOOT SWITCH functions
described on page 112.
> Stop the Accompaniment ...................................................................................................................................................
The accompaniment can be stopped at any time
by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Press the
[ENDING/rit.] button if you want to go to the
ending section and then stop. Press the [ENDING/
rit.] button while the ending section is playing to
produce a “ritardando” ending — i.e. the tempo
gradually slows down during the ending.
INTRO/
FILL to
FADE
IN / OUT
A
ENDING/
rit.
MAIN
B
A
SYNCHRO
START
START/STOP
B
ACCOMPANIMENT DIRECTOR
29
Using the Accompaniment Section
■
Fade-ins and Fade-outs .......................................................................................................................................................
The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to
produce smooth fade-ins and fade-outs when starting and stopping the accompaniment.
To produce a fade-in, press the [FADE IN/OUT]
button so that its indicator lights before starting the
accompaniment. Then when the accompaniment is
started the sound will gradually fade in. The [FADE
IN/OUT] indicator will flash during the fade-in,
and then go out when full volume has been reached.
To produce a fade-out press the [FADE IN/
OUT] button while the accompaniment is playing.
The indicator will flash during the fade out, then the
accompaniment will stop when the fade-out is complete. The [FADE IN/OUT] button indicator will
remain lit after the fade-out, indicating that the fadein mode is engaged. Press the [FADE IN/OUT]
button so that its indicator goes out if you want to
disengage the fade-in mode.
■
INTRO/
FILL to
FADE
IN / OUT
A
ENDING/
rit.
MAIN
B
A
SYNCHRO
START
START/STOP
B
ACCOMPANIMENT DIRECTOR
NOTES
• A Yamaha FC5 footswitch plugged into a rear panel FOOT
SWITCH jack can also be used to activate the fade-ins and fadeouts functions if the appropriate function is assigned to the
footswitch using the FOOT SWITCH functions described on
page 112.
Accompaniment Volume .....................................................................................................................................................
Use the various LCD dials in the MIXER ACCOMPANIMENT VOLUME display to set the
best balance between the corresponding accompaniment parts, and the optimum volume of the accompaniment parts in relation to the orchestra part
voices.
■
The Auto Mute Function ......................................................................................................................................................
When the EASY SETTING ABC display is selected, or when the F2 SPLIT POINT/ABC MODE
display is selected, the AUTO MUTE LCD button
will appear as long as the MANUAL MIDI BASS
ABC mode is not selected. When this function is
turned ON certain AUTO BASS CHORD parts will
either stop playing or play with reduced volume
whenever the right-hand keys are played — so that
the accompaniment does not “get in the way” of
what you play on the keyboard. Normal accompaniment playback resumes when no right-hand keys are
being played.
NOTES
• The AUTO MUTE function will not work with some styles.
30
Using the Accompaniment Section
Changing the “A” Split Point
The “L” split point has already been described on page 16. The “A” split point divides the auto-accompaniment
and manual sections of the keyboard when AUTO BASS CHORD accompaniment (page 23) is engaged. Like the
“L” split point, the “A” split point can be changed as required via the ABC EASY SETTING display, or the SPLIT
POINT/ABC MODE/M. PAD function display (pages 110). The current split points are indicated on the display
both by the split markers and the “splits” in the graphic keyboard.
Z Select the ABC EASY SETTING Display ............................................................................................................
Select the AUTO BASS CHORD easy-setting
display either by turning the [AUTO BASS CHORD]
button on and pressing the EASY SETTING LCD
button before it disappears, or by pressing the EASY
SETTING LCD button while holding the [AUTO
BASS CHORD] button.
X Set the Split Point .......................................................................................................................................................................
The split point can be set in two ways: either use
the SPLIT POINT A LCD dials, or press the desired
key on the keyboard while holding the A DIRECT
SETTING LCD button. The new split point will be
indicated on the graphic keyboard in the LCD.
NOTES
• The “A” split point cannot be set higher than the “L” split
point.
• When the “L” and “A” split points are set at different keys,
the LEFT voice can be played between the “A” and “L” split
points when the AUTO BASS CHORD function on. When
the “L” and “A” split points are set to the same key, the
LEFT voice can be played anywhere to the left of the “L”
and “A” split points.
C Return to the Previous Display When Done ..................................................................................................
Press the EXIT LCD button or [EXIT] panel
button to return to the previous display when done.
31
Using the Accompaniment Section
The Chord Assist Function
The Chord Assist function is essentially an electronic “chord book” that will show you appropriate fingerings for
chords you enter via the display. The fingerings are indicated by dots on the graphic keyboard in the display, and
correspond to those recognized in the ABC FINGERED 1 mode. You can also play chords on the keyboard in the
same way as in the ABC FINGERED 1 mode.
Z Select the Chord Assist Function .............................................................................................................................
Select the CHORD ASSIST display either by
turning the [AUTO BASS CHORD] button on and
pressing the CHORD ASSIST LCD button before it
disappears, or by pressing the CHORD ASSIST
LCD button while holding the [AUTO BASS
CHORD] button.
When the CHORD ASSIST function is selected
the ABC FINGERED 1 mode will automatically be
selected and the split point will be set at C#3.
X Start the Accompaniment ..................................................................................................................................................
Start the accompaniment by using any of the
methods described on page 27.
C Select the Chord Root and Type .................................................................................................................................
Use the ROOT LCD dial to select the desired
chord root.
Use the TYPE LCD dial to select the chord type.
The selected chord root and type will appear on
the graphic keyboard display, and the same chord
will appear in notation form on the musical staff
under “selected CHORD” in the upper half of the
display.
32
Using the Accompaniment Section
V Hear the Chord ...............................................................................................................................................................................
At this point you can “play” and hear the specified chord by pressing the ENTER LCD button —
i.e. the specified chord accompaniment will sound
and the chord will appear in notation form on the
musical staff under “played CHORD” in the upper
half of the display.
NOTES
• Chords which are recognizable by the PSR-7000 CHORD
ASSIST function can also be entered by playing them on
the ABC section of the keyboard. The chord will appear in
notation form on the musical staff under “played CHORD”
in the upper half of the display.
B Invert the Fingering as Necessary ...........................................................................................................................
Use the INVERSION LCD dials to shift the
fingering up or down the keyboard. Each time an
INVERSION LCD dial is pressed the next viable
fingering (inversion) appears on the graphic keyboard display and the musical staff below “selected CHORD”.
N Stop the Accompaniment ...................................................................................................................................................
Press the [START/STOP] button to stop the
accompaniment.
M Exit When Done ............................................................................................................................................................................
Press the EXIT LCD button or the panel [EXIT]
button to exit from the Chord Assist function.
33
Using the Accompaniment Section
The Arranger Buttons
The ARRANGER buttons make it possible to individually mute accompaniment parts to create the
blend and accompaniment “size” you want. When
an ARRANGER button is pressed so that its indicator goes out, the corresponding accompaniment
part(s) are muted. Muted parts can be turned back on
by pressing the appropriate ARRANGER button so
that its indicator lights. The ARRANGER buttons
correspond to the following accompaniment parts:
34
PHRASE
PHRASE 1, PHRASE 2
PAD
PAD
CHORD
CHORD 1, CHORD 2
BASS
BASS
RHYTHM
RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2
ARRANGER
PHRASE
PAD
CHORD
BASS
RHYTHM
One Touch Setting
The PSR-7000’s 120 internal styles each have 4 different preset
“panel setups” that can be selected via the [ONE TOUCH SETTING]
buttons to create different musical textures — e.g. different voices for
the accompaniment parts.
Z Engage the One Touch Setting Feature ..............................................................................................................
The ONE TOUCH SETTING feature can be
used either while an accompaniment is playing or
prior to starting an accompaniment by simply pressing the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button and
selecting the desired ONE TOUCH SETTING setup
by pressing the appropriate LCD button.
ACCOMPANIMENT
ROCK /
ROCK’N’ROLL
JAZZ
POP / BEAT
LATIN
BALLAD
COUNTRY&
WESTERN
DANCE
MARCH /
WALTZ
DISCO
BALLROOM
RHYTHM &
BLUES
CUSTOM
STYLE
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
AUTO BASS CHORD
35
One Touch Setting
X Adjust The Settings If Necessary ..............................................................................................................................
Any of the parameters set by the ONE TOUCH
SETTING feature can be adjusted to create the
desired sound after a ONE TOUCH SETTING setup
has been selected.
NOTES
• See page 140 for a complete listing of the ONE TOUCH
SETTING setup parameters
• One Touch Settings can also be stored in the REGISTRATION memory.
• ONE TOUCH SETTING cannot be used with accompaniment styles created using the Custom Accompaniment
feature described on page 75. An error message will
appear on the display if a Custom Style is selected.
■
THE TEMPO SET FUNCTION ..........................................................................................................................................
The TEMPO SET LCD dials in the ONE TOUCH
SETTING display can be used to turn the ONE
TOUCH SETTING TEMPO SET function ON or
OFF. When ON the tempo will change according to
the tempo setting included in each ONE TOUCH
SETTING setup whenever a different setup is selected. When OFF the tempo will not change when
a different setup is selected, regardless of the tempo
setting it includes.
36
Expression & Effects
■
Harmony ................................................................................................................................................................................................
Press the [HARMONY] button to turn the HARMONY
effect on or off. When HARMONY is on (indicator lit),
playing single notes or chords on the right-hand section of
the keyboard produces automatic harmony matched to the
accompaniment chords. The harmony function can be
turned on when AUTO BASS CHORD accompaniment is
off, but in this case the harmony produced will consist only
of unison and/or octave notes.
HARMONY
SUSTAIN
TOUCH
RESPONSE
REVERB
CHORUS
DSP
EFFECT
NOTES
• The type of harmony produced can be selected via the HARMONY EASY SETTING display, or via the HARMONY function
display. See page 122 for details.
• The harmony is based on the ABC chords, and is added to the
highest note played except when only the LEAD voice is on, in
which case the harmony notes are added to the last note played.
• The HARMONY feature cannot be engaged when the FULL
KEYBOARD ABC mode is selected.
■
Sustain ....................................................................................................................................................................................................
Press the [SUSTAIN] button to turn the sustain effect
on or off. When on (indicator lit), extra sustain is applied
to the selected voice. When sustain is applied via a footswitch,
however, the panel [SUSTAIN] button will not function.
HARMONY
SUSTAIN
TOUCH
RESPONSE
REVERB
CHORUS
DSP
EFFECT
NOTES
• Sustain can be applied to any combination of the LEFT, RIGHT 1,
RIGHT 2, LEAD, and ORGAN voices via the SUSTAIN BUTTON
parameter available via the SUSTAIN EASY SETTING display or
the CONTROLLER function display. See page 112 for details.
• The sustain effect may not produce the same effect for all voices.
37
Expression & Effects
■
Touch Response ..........................................................................................................................................................................
The touch response function turns the PSR-7000’s
initial keyboard velocity and aftertouch response on or off.
Normally, touch response should be turned on — the
[TOUCH RESPONSE] button indicator should be lit —
to allow normal dynamic control via the keyboard. With
initial touch response the harder the keys are played, the
louder the sound. Aftertouch response allows the volume,
timbre, modulation, and pitch of some voices to be varied
according to how hard the keys are pressed after they have
been initially played. In some cases you might want to turn
touch response off (indicator off). For example, most
organs have no keyboard velocity response, so touch response can be turned off for greater realism when playing
organ type voices. Touch response can also be turned off to
create a constant-volume sound with any voice.
Use the [TOUCH RESPONSE] button to turn touch
response on or off as required.
HARMONY
SUSTAIN
TOUCH
RESPONSE
REVERB
CHORUS
DSP
EFFECT
NOTES
• Aftertouch response may produce minimal or no effect with some
voices.
• When two or more of the “right-hand” parts are played at the same
time (RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEAD), aftertouch response may result
in distorted sound with some voices.
• Touch response sensitivity, off level, and voice assignments can
be set via the TOUCH EASY SETTING display, or via the
CONTROLLER function display. See page 115 for details.
■
Reverb .....................................................................................................................................................................................................
Press the [REVERB] button to apply the reverb effect
specified by the REVERB TYPE and DEPTH functions
described on page 118. The [REVERB] button alternately
turns the reverb effect on (indicator lit) or off (indicator
out).
NOTES
• Reverb type and depth settings are available via the REVERB
EASY SETTING display, or via the REVERB/CHORUS/DSP
EFFECT function display. See page 118 for details.
• Reverb type changes will apply to the note currently being played,
while reverb ON/OFF and depth changes will apply to the next
note played.
• Although the [REVERB] indicator will go out, the reverb effect
cannot be turned off during accompaniment or song playback.
38
HARMONY
SUSTAIN
TOUCH
RESPONSE
REVERB
CHORUS
DSP
EFFECT
Expression & Effects
■
Chorus ....................................................................................................................................................................................................
Press the [CHORUS] button to apply the chorus effect
at a depth specified by the CHORUS DEPTH function
described on page 120. The [CHORUS] button alternately
turns the chorus effect on (indicator lit) or off (indicator
out).
HARMONY
SUSTAIN
TOUCH
RESPONSE
REVERB
CHORUS
DSP
EFFECT
NOTES
• Chorus depth settings are available via the CHORUS EASY
SETTING display, or via the REVERB/CHORUS/DSP EFFECT
function display. See page 118 for details.
• Although the [CHORUS] indicator will go out, the chorus effect
cannot be turned off during accompaniment or song playback.
■
DSP Effects ........................................................................................................................................................................................
Press the [DSP EFFECT] button to apply the effect
specified by the DSP EFFECT TYPE and DEPTH functions described on page 120. The [DSP EFFECT] button
alternately turns the effect on (indicator lit) or off (indicator out).
HARMONY
SUSTAIN
TOUCH
RESPONSE
REVERB
CHORUS
DSP
EFFECT
NOTES
• When the default setting is selected, an appropriate DSP effect
will automatically be selected whenever a new voice is selected.
• DSP effect depth, type, and individual parameter settings are
available via the DSP EFFECT EASY SETTING display, or via the
REVERB/CHORUS/DSP EFFECT function display. See page
118 for details.
• Effect type changes will apply to the note currently being played,
while effect ON/OFF and depth changes will apply to the next note
played.
■
Left Hold ................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function causes the LEFT orchestra part voice to
be held even when the keys are released. Non-decaying
voices such as strings are held continuously, while decaytype voices such as piano decay more slowly (as if the
sustain pedal has been pressed).
LEFT ORCHESTRA
PIANO /
ORGAN
STRINGS /
CHOIR
BRASS/
WOODWIND
SYNTH /
PAD
GUITAR/
PERCUSSIVE
CUSTOM
VOICE
LEFT HOLD
LEFT
39
Expression & Effects
■
Pitch Bend Wheel ........................................................................................................................................................................
The PITCH BEND wheel to the left of the keyboard
lets you bend the pitch of notes played on the keyboard up
or down. Normal pitch is restored when the PITCH BEND
wheel is released. The maximum pitch bend range is preset
for each voice, but can be set as required for custom voices
by using the CUSTOM VOICE EDIT feature described on
page 89.
PITCH BEND
MODULATION
UP
MAX
DOWN
MIN
NOTES
• Pitch bend can be applied to the LEFT, RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEAD,
and ORGAN voices — the PITCH BEND WHEEL parameter
described on page 114 allows the pitch bend wheel to be assigned
any of these voices, singly or in any combination.
• The pitch bend wheel may cause sudden pitch changes when
applied to notes at the upper and lower extremes of the keyboard.
■
Modulation Wheel .......................................................................................................................................................................
The MODULATION wheel to the left of the keyboard
lets you apply modulation to notes played on the keyboard
using the LEFT, RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEAD, and ORGAN orchestra part voices. Rolling the MODULATION
wheel upward (away from you) increases the modulation
depth.
NOTES
• Modulation can be applied to the LEFT, RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2,
LEAD, and ORGAN voices — the MODULATION WHEEL parameter described on page 114 allows the modulation wheel to
be assigned any of these voices, singly or in any combination.
• With some voices the MODULATION wheel changes the depth
of effects or the timbre of the sound.
40
PITCH BEND
MODULATION
UP
MAX
DOWN
MIN
Expression & Effects
■
Digital Equalizer ...........................................................................................................................................................................
The PSR-7000 features a digital 5-band equalizer that can be used to “shape” the overall frequency characteristics of the instrument to create a
wide range of tonal variations.
Press the [DIGITAL EQUALIZER] button to
access the equalizer controls. 5 preset equalizer
curves and one programmable “USER” curve are
provided. The various curves can be selected by
pressing the appropriate LCD button or by rotating
the SELECT dial.
DIGITAL
EQUALIZER
MIXER
LIST
HOLD
The USER curve can be programmed as required
via the corresponding LCD dials — LOW through
HIGH. Each of the 5 bands can be boosted (“+”
values) or cut (“–” values) by up to 12 dB. Any
changes are shown graphically via both the controls
and the markers in the USER curve. The USER
curve is automatically selected whenever any of the
equalizer parameters are edited.
Press the [DIGITAL EQUALIZER] or [EXIT]
button to return to the normal play mode display.
NOTES
• Extreme digital equalizer settings may result in distorted
sound with some voices.
41
The Multi Pads
The PSR-7000 features 8 “MULTI PADs” above the keyboard that can be used in
two ways:
● PHRASE/CHORD: When the PHRASE/CHORD mode is selected, the 4 pads marked “PHRASE”
and the 4 pads marked “CHORD” can be used to record and play back
short sequences of notes and chords, respectively.
● PERCUSSION:
In the PERCUSSION mode the pads can be used to play 8 different drum
and percussion instruments selected from the PSR-7000’s DRUM KIT
voices and Custom Voice DRUM KIT voice.
PERCUSSION
REC/STOP
PHRASE/CHORD
PLAYING
PHRASE
1
2
3
4
5
PHRASE/CHORD
CHORD
6
7
8
MULTI PAD
NOTES
• MULTI PAD data can be saved to floppy disk. See page 98 for details.
The PHRASE/CHORD Mode
To engage the PHRASE/CHORD mode, press the [PHRASE/
CHORD - PERCUSSION] button so that the PHRASE/CHORD
indicator lights (the PHRASE/CHORD and PERCUSSION indicators light alternately each time the button is pressed).
PERCUSSION
REC/STOP
PHRASE/CHORD
NOTES
• Preset data is initially recorded in pads 1 through 8.
The PHRASE Pads (pads 1 … 4)
Each PHRASE pad can record up to approximately 350 notes played using the RIGHT 1,
RIGHT 2, or LEAD voices (only one of these voices is recorded). The recorded phrases can then
be played back at any time — even while playing on the keyboard, with or without accompaniment. The PHRASE pads record the following data:
• Notes
• Key velocity (touch response)
• Voice number
• Volume
• Sustain
• Modulation
• Pitch bend
• PAN
• SOSTENUTO
• SOFT PEDAL
• Reverb depth
• Part tune
42
The Multi Pads
■
Recording Phrases ....................................................................................................................................................................
Z Select a PHRASE Pad For Recording
PERCUSSION
REC/STOP
Press the PHRASE pad you intend to record to
while holding the [REC/STOP] button. The REC/
STOP indicator will flash, indicating that the selected pad is ready to record.
PHRASE/CHORD
PLAYING
PHRASE
1
2
3
4
5
PHRASE/CHORD
CHORD
6
7
8
MULTI PAD
X Play a Phrase
Recording begins automatically as soon as you
play on the keyboard using the RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2,
or LEAD voice (see “NOTES”, below), and the
REC/STOP indicator will light continuously as long
as recording continues.
NOTES
• Only one voice can be recorded to the pads.
• If more than one voice is selected when the pad record
mode is engaged, the voice with the highest priority will be
used for recording. The RIGHT 1 voice has the highest
priority, followed by the RIGHT 2 voice, and then the
LEAD voice.
• The RIGHT 1 voice will automatically be selected if the
RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, and LEAD voices are off or ORGAN
FLUTE is on when the pad record mode is engaged.
• When a pad is recorded all previous data in that pad will
be erased and replaced by the new data.
• The preset pad data can be reloaded via the RECALL
PRESET DATA function described on page 123.
• Recorded phrases which are to be played using the
CHORD MATCH function (page 111) should be recorded
in the key of C major 7.
• You can record phrases while AUTO BASS CHORD
accompaniment is playing or stopped. In either case the
phrase will be recorded in relation to the currently set
accompaniment tempo, so it is a good idea to record
phrases while monitoring the accompaniment to ensure
that they are reproduced at an appropriate tempo when
played back with accompaniment.
C Stop Recording
Press the [REC/STOP] button to stop recording
when you’ve finished playing the phrase. The [REC/
STOP] button indicator will go out when recording
ends.
PERCUSSION
REC/STOP
PHRASE/CHORD
PLAYING
PHRASE
1
2
3
4
5
PHRASE/CHORD
CHORD
6
7
8
NOTES
• Recording will stop automatically if the PHRASE pad
memory becomes full (approximately 350 notes per pad),
or if another pad is pressed.
MULTI PAD
43
The Multi Pads
■
Phrase Playback ..........................................................................................................................................................................
As long as the PHRASE/CHORD mode is selected,
any recorded phrase can be played back simply by
pressing the corresponding PHRASE pad. The phrase
will play back whether the accompaniment is playing or
not, but will always play at the currently set tempo. The
PHRASE/CHORD PLAYING indicator will light while
the phrase plays back, and playback will end automatically as soon as the end of the phrase is reached. A
phrase can be stopped while it is playing by pressing
either the [REC/STOP] button or the corresponding
pad button. It is also possible to play back several
phrases at the same time.
If a PHRASE pad is played while AUTO BASS
CHORD accompaniment is playing and the CHORD
MATCH function for that pad is ON (see “The Repeat
& Chord Match Settings”, below), the phrase will be
automatically re-harmonized to match the accompaniment chords.
PERCUSSION
REC/STOP
PHRASE/CHORD
PLAYING
PHRASE
1
2
3
4
5
PHRASE/CHORD
CHORD
6
7
8
MULTI PAD
NOTES
• Phrase pad data can be saved to and loaded from disk (page
96), but can not be memorized by the Registration feature
(page 49).
• Use the M.PAD VOLUME control in the MIXER MAIN VOLUME display to adjust the playback volume of the phrase
pads.
• Only one pad can be played at a time in the SONG RECORD
mode (page 58).
The CHORD Pads (pads 5 … 8)
Each CHORD pad can record up to approximately 50 chords played on the left-hand
section of the keyboard when the AUTO BASS CHORD feature is engaged. The recorded
chords can then be played back when ABC is engaged and an accompaniment is playing.
■
Recording Chords ......................................................................................................................................................................
Z Select a CHORD Pad For Recording
Press the CHORD pad you intend to record to while
holding the [REC/STOP] button. The REC/STOP indicator will flash, indicating that the selected pad is ready
to record. If the accompaniment is stopped when the
CHORD pad is selected for recording, the SYNCHRO
START mode will automatically be engaged.
NOTES
• If AUTO BASS CHORD is OFF when a CHORD pad is
selected for recording, it will automatically be turned ON.
Further, if the MANUAL MIDI BASS mode is selected, the
FINGERED 1 mode will automatically be selected.
44
PERCUSSION
REC/STOP
PHRASE/CHORD
PLAYING
PHRASE
1
2
3
4
5
MULTI PAD
PHRASE/CHORD
CHORD
6
7
8
The Multi Pads
X Play the Required Chords
Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a chord
on the left-hand section of the keyboard, and the REC/STOP
indicator will light continuously as long as recording continues.
C Stop Recording
PERCUSSION
REC/STOP
Press the [REC/STOP] button or the pad being recorded to
stop recording when you’ve finished playing the chords. The
[REC/STOP] button indicator will go out when recording ends.
PHRASE/CHORD
PLAYING
3
NOTES
4
5
PHRASE/CHORD
CHORD
6
7
8
MULTI PAD
• Recording will stop automatically if the CHORD pad memory becomes
full (approximately 50 chords per pad); if another pad is pressed; or if the
accompaniment [START/STOP], or [SYNCHRO START] button is
pressed.
• Quarter note steps are the smallest that can be recorded.
■
Chord Playback .............................................................................................................................................................................
As long as the PHRASE/CHORD mode is selected and an
AUTO BASS CHORD accompaniment is playing, any recorded
chord sequence can be played back simply by pressing the
corresponding CHORD pad. The chord sequence will play back
at the currently set tempo. The PHRASE/CHORD PLAYING
indicator will light while the chord sequence plays back, and
playback will end automatically as soon as the end of the
sequence is reached. Only one chord sequence can be played at
a time.
During chord pad playback the AUTO BASS CHORD indicator will go out and the left-hand section of the keyboard plays in
the same way as the right-hand section. To indicate that the end
of the chord sequence is approaching, the PHRASE/CHORD
PLAYING indicator flashes during the last two measures (if the
REPEAT mode is not engaged — see below). A chord sequence
that is playing can be stopped by pressing the same chord pad
again, or by pressing the [REC/STOP] button. The AUTO BASS
CHORD function will continue playing the last chord played in
the chord sequence.
PERCUSSION
REC/STOP
PHRASE/CHORD
PLAYING
3
4
5
PHRASE/CHORD
CHORD
6
7
8
MULTI PAD
NOTES
• If you press a CHORD pad while the accompaniment is stopped or while
the AUTO BASS CHORD function is off, “Engage ABC to play the chord
pads” will appear on the display. Also, if AUTO BASS CHORD is on but
the MANUAL MIDI BASS mode is selected, “Engage SF, FC1, FC2,
FULL KEYBOARD, or AUTO MIDI BASS mode to play the chord pads”
will appear on the display, since chord playback will not function in the
MANUAL MIDI BASS mode.
• Chord pad data can be saved to and loaded from disk (page 96), but can
not be memorized by the Registration feature (page 49).
• Playback occurs in measure units. Playback will continue until the end of
the measure even if recording was stopped prior to the end of that
measure.
45
The Multi Pads
■
The Repeat & Chord Match Settings ......................................................................................................................
The repeat and chord match settings for PHRASE/
CHORD pad playback can be accessed by pressing
the EASY SETTING LCD button that appears when
the [PERCUSSION - PHRASE/CHORD] button
is pressed. Once the easy setting display has been
selected the repeat and chord match parameters can
be accessed by pressing the REPEAT or CHORD
MATCH LCD button.
Press either the EXIT LCD button or the panel
[EXIT] button when done.
NOTES
• The MULTI PAD repeat and chord match settings are also
available via the MULTI PAD FUNCTION display — page
111.
● REPEAT
When a check mark appears in a REPEAT box in
the REPEAT display, the corresponding pad —
PHRASE or CHORD — will playback repeatedly
until stopped by either pressing the same MULTI
PAD again, or by pressing the [REC/STOP] button.
Use the LCD dials to turn repeat for the corresponding pads ON or OFF as required.
NOTES
• The default repeat settings are: pads 1…4 OFF; pads
5…8 ON.
● CHORD MATCH
When a check mark appears in a CHORD MATCH
box in the CHORD MATCH display, the phrase
played by the corresponding PHRASE pad will be
automatically re-harmonized to match the accompaniment chords if the PHRASE pad is played while
AUTO BASS CHORD accompaniment is playing.
46
The Multi Pads
Use the LCD dials to turn the chord match function for
the corresponding pads ON or OFF as required.
NOTES
• Phrases to be played back using the CHORD MATCH function
must be recorded in the key of C major 7.
• The chord match function is only available for pads 1 through 4 (the
PHRASE pads).
• The default chord match settings are:1 and 2 OFF; 3 and 4 ON.
The PERCUSSION Mode
To engage the PERCUSSION mode, press the [PHRASE/CHORD PERCUSSION] button so that the PERCUSSION indicator lights (the
PHRASE/CHORD and PERCUSSION indicators light alternately each
time the button is pressed).
The 8 pads are initially programmed with the following drum and
percussion instruments which can be played via the pads when the PERCUSSION mode is selected:
1. Kick M
2. Snare M
3. C.Hi-Hat
4. O.Hi-Hat
■
PERCUSSION
REC/STOP
PHRASE/CHORD
5. MidTom H
6. Low Tom
7. F Tom L
8. CrashCy2
Assigning Different Instruments To the PERCUSSION Pads ......................................................
Z Press [REC/STOP]
PERCUSSION
REC/STOP
PHRASE/CHORD
Press the [REC/STOP] button so that its indicator
lights (make sure the PERCUSSION mode is selected
first). The PERCUSSION PAD ASSIGN display will appear, listing the percussion instruments currently assigned
to the pads.
X Select a Drum Voice
Use the DRUM KIT LCD dials to select the drum voice
which includes the percussion instruments you want to
assign.
47
The Multi Pads
C Assign the Instruments
A new drum/percussion instrument is assigned
to a pad simply by playing the key corresponding to
the desired instrument while holding the pad to
which it is to be assigned. The reverse also works:
press the pad while holding the key. The velocity at
which you play the key (how hard you press the key
= how loud the note sounds) is also recorded to the
specified pad.
PERCUSSION
REC/STOP
PHRASE/CHORD
PLAYING
PHRASE
1
2
3
4
5
PHRASE/CHORD
CHORD
6
7
8
MULTI PAD
NOTES
• Percussion voices created using the CUSTOM VOICE
EDIT functions described on page 84 can also be assigned to the percussion pads.
V Press [REC/STOP] To End Assignment
When you’re finished making instrument assignments to the PERCUSSION pads, press the
[REC/STOP] button so that its indicator goes out.
PERCUSSION
REC/STOP
PHRASE/CHORD
PLAYING
PHRASE
1
2
3
NOTES
4
5
PHRASE/CHORD
CHORD
6
7
8
MULTI PAD
• Percussion pad data can be saved to and loaded from disk
(page 96), but can not be memorized by the Registration
feature (page 49).
■
Playing the Percussion Pads .........................................................................................................................................
The PERCUSSION pads can be played at any
time — whether an accompaniment is playing or not
— as long as the PERCUSSION mode is selected.
Depending on the assigned instrument, some pads
will play continuously as long as they are held.
NOTES
• The PERCUSSION pad sounds are not affected by the
PSR-7000 PITCH BEND wheel or MODULATION wheel.
48
PERCUSSION
REC/STOP
PHRASE/CHORD
PLAYING
PHRASE
1
2
3
4
5
MULTI PAD
PHRASE/CHORD
CHORD
6
7
8
Registration Memory
The PSR-7000 Registration Memory feature can be used to memorize 128 complete control-panel setups (16 banks, 8 setups each) that
you can recall whenever needed.
NOTES
• Registration data can be saved to and loaded from floppy disk as required (page 96).
• The disk provided with the PSR-7000 contains a number of sample registration settings.
Registering the Panel Settings
Z Set Up the Controls as Required ...............................................................................................................................
Make the desired control settings.
NOTES
• See page 140 for a complete listing of the data stored by
the Registration function.
X Register in Memory ...................................................................................................................................................................
Use the BANK [–] or [+] button
to select the desired memory bank
— the bank number is shown next to
REG. BANK in the upper right corner of the display. Press and hold the
[MEMORY] button, then press one
of the REGISTRATION buttons.
Any data that was previously in the
selected location is erased and replaced by the new settings.
BANK 1~16
+
–
FREEZE
1
2
1
2
MEMORY
BANK 1~16
–
+
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION
49
Registration Memory
Entering a Registration Name
You can enter descriptive names up to 16 characters in length for each registration setup via the NAME
function accessible via the registration EASY SETTING display. The same function is also available via
the FUNCTION display — page 122.
Z Select the NAME Function ................................................................................................................................................
Press the EASY SETTING LCD button that appears when a BANK button or the [MEMORY]
button is pressed before it disappears. When the
easy setting display appears, select the NAME function by pressing the corresponding LCD button.
X Enter a Name ...................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the < > LCD dial to move the name cursor
to the various character positions, then use the A~Z,
a~z, or 0~9… LCD dial to select the required
character for each position. The A~Z LCD dial
selects capital letters, the a~z LCD dial selects
lower-case letters, and the 0~9… LCD dial selects
numbers and special characters.
NOTES
• It’s a good idea to give your registration setups names that
make them easily identifiable. If you’ve created a registration setup for a song named “MySong”, a good registration
name might be something like “MySong-Reg”.
C Exit When Done .............................................................................................................................................................................
Press either the EXIT LCD button or the panel
[EXIT] button when done.
50
Registration Memory
Recalling the Registered Panel Settings
Simply select the appropriate bank
using the BANK [–] or [+] button
and press the desired REGISTRATION button at any time to recall
the memorized settings. The memorized settings are actually recalled
only when a REGISTRATION
button is pressed — selecting a different bank does not change the
settings.
FREEZE
MEMORY
BANK 1~16
–
+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REGISTRATION
The selected bank and registration number appears at the top of the display. The registration name
appears to the right of the bank and number.
If any change is made to a setting memorized by
the REGISTRATION feature, “REGIST EDITED”
appears in place of the bank, number, and name to
indicate that the current panel settings do not exactly
correspond to the selected registration memory.
51
Registration Memory
The Freeze Function
If you press the [FREEZE] button so that its LED lights, selecting a
different registration setup will not change the settings specified in the
FREEZE GROUP SETTING display accessed either via the registration
EASY SETTING display or the [FUNCTION] button (page 122).
FREEZE
MEMORY
BANK 1~16
–
+
1
2
The Freeze Group Settings
You can specify which settings are affected by the FREEZE function via the FREEZE GROUP SETTING
function accessible via the registration EASY SETTING display. The same function is also available via the
FUNCTION display — page 122.
Z Select the FREEZE GROUP SETTING Function ........................................................................................
Press the EASY SETTING LCD button that appears when a BANK button or the [MEMORY]
button is pressed before it disappears. When the
easy setting display appears, select the FREEZE
GROUP SETTING function by pressing the corresponding LCD button.
X Mark the Settings to be “Frozen” .....
Use the GROUP SELECT LCD dials to select a
setting you want to freeze or “un-freeze”, then use
the MARK LCD dial to set or remove the check
mark for that setting. Repeat until all settings are
marked or un-marked as required.
C Exit When Done .............................................................................................................................................................................
Press either the EXIT LCD button or the panel
[EXIT] button when done.
52
Song Playback & Recording
Song Playback
The PSR-7000 SONG PLAY mode allows song data to be played back from a floppy disk or the optional hard
disk. The song file types which can be played by the PSR-7000 are: songs recorded on the PSR-7000, DOC (Disk
Orchestra Collection), PianoSoft and GM song (SMF format). Refer to the DOC or SMF disk manuals as necessary.
About the Supplied Disk
The floppy disk supplied with the PSR-7000 includes a number of sample songs with wave data that are automatically
loaded when the disk is inserted. When the data is loaded the SONG PLAY mode is automatically engaged, and you
can then select and play the various sample songs as described below. Please note that the internal wave data (custom voice data), registration data, and SETUP data will be overwritted by the data loaded from the supplied disk.
Z Insert a Song Disk ......................................................................................................................................................................
Insert a song disk into the PSR-7000 disk drive
— a disk containing songs you have recorded on the
PSR-7000 yourself, a Yamaha DOC (Disk Orchestra
Collection), a Yamaha PianoSoft disk, or a GM song
disk. The SONG PLAY mode will be automatically
engaged if a DOC, PianoSoft or GM song disk is
inserted (and an accompaniment is not playing).
Otherwise engage the SONG PLAY mode as described in the following step.
X Engage the Song Play Mode ...........................................................................................................................................
Press the [SONG PLAY] button to engage the
SONG PLAY mode. The SONG PLAY display will
appear.
SONG
PLAY
CUSTOM
VOICE EDIT
SONG
CUSTOM
RECORD ACCOMP. REC
FUNCTION
DISK
NOTES
• If the optional hard disk is present, DIR ▲▼ dials will be
available in the SONG PLAY display. These can be used
to select the floppy disk or the hard disk directory containing the desired song.
53
Song Playback & Recording
C Select a Play Mode ....................................................................................................................................................................
Use the MODE LCD dials to select a play mode:
SINGLE
Plays the single song selected via
the SONG SELECT controls.
ALL
Plays all songs in the song list in
order.
CHAIN
Plays the songs specified in the
CHAIN LIST in the specified order.
Set this via the MAKE CHAIN button.
RANDOM
Plays all songs in the song list in
random order.
Also, use the REPEAT LCD dial to turn the
repeat mode ON or OFF as required. When ON,
playback will repeat continuously until stopped.
V Start/Stop Playback ..................................................................................................................................................................
Press the START LCD button to start playback.
Playback will stop automatically when the specified
song(s) have been played all the way through (unless the repeat mode is ON). You can also stop
playback at any time by pressing the STOP [■] LCD
button.
NOTES
• The ORGAN FLUTE voice cannot be played on the
keyboard when playing back a track on which the
ORGAN FLUTE voice is recorded.
■
Pause, Fast Forward & Reverse ..................................................................................................................................
When you press the STOP [■] LCD button,
playback stops and the song position returns to the
beginning of the song. The PAUSE LCD button,
however, lets you pause playback and then start
again from the same point in the song. Playback can
be restarted either by pressing the PAUSE LCD
button again or by pressing the START LCD button.
While the PAUSE mode is engaged the F.F.
[f] (Fast Forward) and REW [r] (Reverse) LCD
buttons rapidly move the playback location forward
and backward in 1-measure steps, respectively. The
[r] and [f] buttons can be used both during
playback and while playback is paused. The REW
[r] LCD button will not appear and reverse operation will not be possible when a GM song disk (SMF
Format 1) is being played.
54
The display shown appears when
the supplied disk is used.
Song Playback & Recording
Chain Playback
Chain playback allows any number of songs to be grouped together in any order for playback.
To program a chain:
Z Press the MAKE CHAIN LCD Button .....................................................................................................................
The MAKE CHAIN LCD button will take you to
the chain programming display.
X Select and Insert the Required Songs .................................................................................................................
Use the SONG LCD dials to select a song, use the
CHAIN LIST LCD dials to select a position in the
chain if the chain contains more than one song, and
finally press the INS LCD button to insert the song
at the current position. Repeat this process to insert
the required songs at the required locations.
C Delete Songs As Required ................................................................................................................................................
To delete a song from the chain list simply use
the CHAIN LIST LCD dials to select the song to be
deleted, then press the DEL LCD button.
55
Song Playback & Recording
V Save the Chain List, If Necessary .............................................................................................................................
The completed chain list can be saved to disk by
pressing the LIST SAVE LCD button. A confirmation display will appear (“OK to save chain data?”):
press YES to save the list or NO to cancel.
NOTES
• Chain list data cannot be saved to a DOC or PianoSoft
disk.
B Return to the Song Select Display ...........................................................................................................................
Press the SONG SEL. LCD button to return to the
SONG SELECT display.
Volume & Mute/Solo Settings
The volume, mute, and solo parameters for song
playback are available via the VOLUME/MUTE
display which can be accessed by pressing the [ ]
LCD button to the right of the display. Press the
VOLUME or MUTE LCD button to switch to the
corresponding display.
56
Song Playback & Recording
The number of volume parameters in the TRACK
VOLUME display will depend on the type of song
being played. If an original song recorded on the
PSR-7000 using the QUICK RECORD mode is
being played, two volume parameters will be available: MANUAL and ACCOMP. If an original song
recorded on the PSR-7000 using the MULTITRACK
RECORD mode or a GM song is being played,
individual parameters for all 16 tracks will be available: TR1 through TR16. Use the LCD dials to set
the volume of the corresponding tracks. If a Yamaha
DOC song is being played use the RHY, BASS,
ORCH, LEFT, and RIGHT LCD dials to set the
volume of the corresponding tracks (see the DOC or
PianoSoft software manual for more details). If a
PianoSoft song is being played use the ORCH,
LEFT, and RIGHT LCD dials to set the volume of the
corresponding tracks.
The LCD dials in the TRACK MUTE display
allow PLAY, MUTE, or SOLO to be selected for
each track group. Muted tracks do not play. If a track
is set to SOLO only that track will play.
The track indicators above the volume or mute/
solo parameters indicate which tracks contain data
and which are muted. Tracks which do not contain
data are indicated by a dotted circle outline while
tracks which contain data have a solid outline. Playenabled tracks are indicated by a filled circle while
tracks that are muted are indicated by an outline
only.
QUICK RECORD song
MULTITRACK RECORD song
DOC song
NOTES
• When GM song is played all tracks appear on the display
as if they contain data, even if they don’t.
GM song
57
Song Playback & Recording
Song Recording
The PSR-7000 SONG RECORD mode allows anything you play to be recorded to floppy disk. A QUICK
RECORD mode provides an easy way to record a melody with accompaniment, while a MULTITRACK record mode
allows independent recording on up to 16 tracks. There’s also a CHORD SEQUENCE record mode available via the
QUICK record mode.
Z Insert a Recordable Disk .....................................................................................................................................................
Insert a properly formatted disk in the PSR-7000
disk drive.
X Engage the Song Record Mode ...................................................................................................................................
Press the [SONG RECORD] button to engage
the SONG RECORD mode. The SONG RECORD
display will appear.
NOTES
• If an unformatted disk or a disk which has not been
formatted for use with the PSR-7000 is inserted, the
“Wrong disk format! Format disk?” confirmation message
will appear when the SONG RECORD mode is selected.
Press YES to format the disk or NO to cancel.
• If a GM disk is in the drive when the SONG RECORD
mode is engaged, the “Not a user disk! Recording to this
disk will convert it to a user disk. OK to record?” message
will appear on the display. Press YES to enter the record
mode or NO to cancel.
• If a DOC or PianoSoft disk is in the drive when the SONG
RECORD mode is engaged the “Write protected!” message will appear and it will not be possible to enter the
record mode.
• If the optional hard disk is present, DIR ▲▼ dials will be
available in the SONG PLAY display. These can be used
to select the floppy disk or the hard disk directory to which
the song is to be recorded.
58
SONG
PLAY
CUSTOM
VOICE EDIT
SONG
CUSTOM
RECORD ACCOMP. REC
FUNCTION
DISK
Song Playback & Recording
C Select a Song ..................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the SONG LCD dials to select either an
existing song for additional recording or a new song
(“ ” on the SONG LIST) to record a new song.
V Enter a Song Name, If Necessary .............................................................................................................................
You can enter an original name for the song at
this point. Song names can be up to 12 characters
long. Use the < > LCD dial to move the name
cursor to the various character positions, then use
the A~Z, a~z, or 0~9… LCD dial to select the
required character for each position. The A~Z LCD
dial selects capital letters, the a~z control selects
lower-case letters, and the 0~9… LCD dial selects
numbers and special characters.
B Select a Record Mode ............................................................................................................................................................
Press the QUICK RECORD or MULTI TRACK
LCD button to select the corresponding record mode.
59
Song Playback & Recording
Quick Record
The QUICK RECORD mode, as its name suggests, makes track selection and recording easy by grouping the
accompaniment and manual tracks.
Z Set the Track Modes .................................................................................................................................................................
Use the MANUAL and ACCOMP. LCD dials to
the select the REC mode for the track(s) to be
recorded, the PLAY mode for the tracks to be played
while recording, or the MUTE mode for tracks
neither to be played or recorded. The PLAY mode
can only be selected for tracks which contain data.
NOTES
• Note that the SYNCHRO START mode is automatically
engaged when the QUICK RECORD mode is selected, so
be careful not to play the keyboard before you’re ready to
actually start recording, or recording will begin automatically. SYNCHRO START can be disengaged by pressing
the [SYNCHRO START] button.
X Set Up For the Recording ..................................................................................................................................................
Select the required voice(s), select a style, turn
AUTO BASS CHORD on if required (see “NOTES”
below). Set up all parameters as desired for recording. The voices, multi-pad notes, harmony notes,
and accompaniment parts are recorded on the various tracks as listed to the right.
NOTES
• If you turn the panel [AUTO BASS CHORD] button on, the
ACCOMP. tracks will automatically be set to the REC
mode.
• If the REC mode is engaged for the ACCOMP. tracks the
panel [AUTO BASS CHORD] button will be turned on
automatically.
• When the QUICK RECORD mode is selected and a threenote HARMONY TYPE is selected, only two harmony
notes will be recorded.
60
MANUAL
VOICE
LEAD voice
RIGHT 1 voice
ORGAN FLUTE
voice
LEFT voice
MULTI PAD
HARMONY
RIGHT 2 voice
ACCOMPANIMENT
TRACK
1
2
3
4
5
6…7
8
PART
RHYTHM 1
RHYTHM 2
BASS
CHORD 1
CHORD 2
PAD
PHRASE 1
PHRASE 2
TRACK
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Song Playback & Recording
C Turn the Metronome On If Required .......................................................................................................................
Use the METRONOME LCD dials to turn the
metronome ON if you want to record while monitoring the metronome sound (the metronome sound is
not recorded).
V Start Recording .............................................................................................................................................................................
If the SYNCHRO START mode is engaged (it is
engaged automatically when the QUICK RECORD
mode is selected) you can start recording by simply
playing on the keyboard. Otherwise use the START
LCD button or the panel [START] button.
NOTES
• Any previous data in a track will be erased when that track
is recorded.
• When the record mode is engaged and accompaniment is
stopped, prior to actually starting recording, the amount of
available disk space will appear in the upper right corner
of the display in approximate kilobytes. The measure
number is displayed in this location when recording is
started.
B Stop Recording .............................................................................................................................................................................
Stop recording by pressing the STOP LCD button, the panel [STOP] button or the [ENDING]
button. When recording is stopped the “Saving to
disk” message may appear on the display while the
recorded data is being saved to the disk.
61
Song Playback & Recording
■
THE TRACK INDICATORS ...................................................................................................................................................
The track indicators above the track mode selectors indicate which tracks contain data and which
are muted. Tracks which do not contain data are
indicated by a dotted circle outline while tracks
which contain data have a solid outline. Play-enabled tracks are indicated by a filled circle while
tracks that are muted are indicated by an outline
only.
Play-enabled
Muted
No data
■
Record-enabled
TRACK DELETE ............................................................................................................................................................................
When the DEL LCD button is pressed DELETE
will appear for tracks which contain data. Select
DELETE via the MANUAL or ACCOMP. track
LCD dials while holding the DEL button to delete all
data in the corresponding tracks. The data is actually
deleted when the DEL LCD button is released.
When the DEL LCD button is pressed, tracks set to
REC will automatically be switched to PLAY or
MUTE.
■
PLAYBACK .........................................................................................................................................................................................
Recorded tracks are automatically set to the
PLAY mode when recording is stopped, so you can
simply press the START LCD button or the [START]
panel button to hear what you’ve recorded immediately after recording. All other playback functions
are the same as described on the “Song Playback”
section (page 53).
NOTES
• If the panel [ORGAN FLUTE] button is turned on before
playing a song recorded with an ORGAN FLUTE voice,
the panel ORGAN FLUTE settings will be used.
• An ORGAN FLUTE voice cannot be played on the keyboard when playing a song that was recorded with an
ORGAN FLUTE voice.
■
EXITING .................................................................................................................................................................................................
Press the [SONG RECORD] or [EXIT] button
to exit from the QUICK RECORD mode and return
to the normal play mode.
62
SONG
PLAY
CUSTOM
VOICE EDIT
SONG
CUSTOM
RECORD ACCOMP. REC
FUNCTION
EXIT
DISK
Song Playback & Recording
Chord Step Recording
The CHORD STEP recording feature makes it possible to record accompaniment chord changes one at a time
with precise timing. Since the changes don’t have to entered in real time, it is easy to create even complex
accompaniments before recording the melody.
Select the CHORD STEP display via the [ ] or [ ] LCD button to the right of the display.
Z Select an Entry Point ...............................................................................................................................................................
Use the < >CURSOR< > LCD dials to position
the cursor at the measure and beat at which you want
to enter a chord or other accompaniment event. The
large < > controls move the cursor in 1-measure
steps while the small < > controls position the
cursor in the smallest increment allowed for the
current style. Measure numbers appear above each
measure division on the “data line”, and the smaller
division represent the smallest increment available
for the current style. The measure numbers will
scroll accordingly when the cursor is moved past the
last or first measure on the display (but not backwards past measure 1).
X Specify a Chord, Volume Change, or Other Event ..................................................................................
To specify a chord change use the ROOT and
TYPE LCD dials to specify the chord. It is also
possible to enter chords directly via the AUTO
BASS CHORD section of the keyboard.
To specify a volume change use the VOL. LCD
dial to specify the new volume level.
Other events which can be entered via the panel
controls are: STYLE changes, [MAIN A], [MAIN
B], [INTRO A/FILL to A], [INTRO B/FILL to B],
[ENDING], and TEMPO changes. STYLE change,
[MAIN A], [MAIN B], and [ENDING] events can
only be entered at the top of each measure. The
edited event appears in inverse text.
63
Song Playback & Recording
C Enter the Specified Event(s) ...........................................................................................................................................
Once the event or events to be entered have been
specified as described in the preceding step, press
the SET LCD button to actually enter the event at the
current cursor position. A dot will appear on the
CHORD STEP data line and the cursor will advance
to the top of the next measure.
V Repeat Until Done .............................................
Repeat steps 1 through 3, above, until the required number of chord changes and other accompaniment events have been entered. The end of the
sequence is automatically set at the end of the last
measure containing data, the insert point of an END
event (available at the bottom of the TYPE list).
■
DELETING EVENTS ..................................................................................................................................................................
When the cursor is located at any previouslyentered dot on the CHORD STEP data line, the type
of event(s) recorded in that location are indicated by
triangular markers (s) to the left of the corresponding event names in the event window. When only
one type of event has been entered at the cursor
location an eraser icon appears to the right of the
corresponding event in the event window, and that
event can be erased simply by pressing the DEL
LCD button. When more that one type of event has
been entered at the cursor location the SELECT
LCD dial can be used to place the eraser icon next to
any of these events, and the specified event can be
erased by pressing the DEL LCD button. Events at
the top of a measure can be changed but not deleted.
64
Song Playback & Recording
Quick Record Mode Edit Functions
The QUICK RECORD mode EDIT display includes only one function: SONG DELETE.
Select the EDIT display via the [ ] LCD button to the right of the display.
■
SONG DELETE ...............................................................................................................................................................................
This function deletes the specified song file from the disk.
NOTES
• The song currently being recorded cannot be deleted.
• The amount of remaining disk space is displayed in the
upper right corner of the display in approximate kilobytes
while recording or playback is stopped.
Z Select a Song
Use the SONG LCD dials to select the song to be
deleted.
NOTES
• If the optional hard disk is present, DIR ▲▼ dials will be
available which can be used to select the floppy disk or the
hard disk directory containing the song to be deleted.
X Delete the Song
Press the EXECUTE LCD button. The “Ready to
Delete ********. OK to delete?” confirmation
message will appear (“********” is the song name).
Press YES to delete the song or NO to cancel.
65
Song Playback & Recording
Multitrack Record
The MULTITRACK record mode allows independent recording and playback on any of 16 tracks, so even complex
songs can be built up track by track.
Z Set the Track Modes .................................................................................................................................................................
Use the TR1 through TR16 LCD dials to the
select the REC mode for the track(s) to be recorded,
the PLAY mode for the tracks to be played while
recording, or the MUTE mode for tracks neither to
be played or recorded. The PLAY mode can only be
selected for tracks which contain data. The TR1-8
or TR9-16 LCD button selects track groups 1
through 8 and 9 through 16, respectively.
X Change the Track Parts, If Required .......................................................................................................................
The default part for each track is displayed above
the REC setting. The parts can be changed as required by selecting them via the corresponding LCD
dials. When the part has been changed, move back
down to the REC setting.
NOTES
• ORGAN FLUTE voices can be recorded on track 3.
66
Song Playback & Recording
C Set Up For the Recording ..................................................................................................................................................
Select the required voice(s), select a style, turn
AUTO BASS CHORD on if required. Set up all
parameters as desired for recording.
NOTES
• If you turn the panel [AUTO BASS CHORD] button on, the
accompaniment tracks will automatically be set to the
REC mode.
• If the panel [AUTO BASS CHORD] button is turned off the
accompaniment track REC modes will be disengaged.
• If no AUTO BASS CHORD track is set to the REC mode,
the [AUTO BASS CHORD] button will automatically be
turned off.
• If the REC mode is engaged for any of the accompaniment
tracks the panel [AUTO BASS CHORD] button will be
turned on automatically.
V Start Recording .............................................................................................................................................................................
Engage the SYNCHRO START mode if you
want to start recording automatically as soon as you
start playing on the keyboard. Otherwise use the
START LCD button or the panel [START] button.
NOTES
• Any previous data in a track will be erased when that track
is recorded.
• When the record mode is engaged and accompaniment is
stopped, prior to actually starting recording, the amount of
available disk space will appear in the upper right corner
of the display in approximate kilobytes. The measure
number is displayed in this location when recording is
started.
B Stop Recording .............................................................................................................................................................................
Stop recording by pressing the STOP LCD button, the panel [STOP] button or the [ENDING]
button. When recording is stopped the “Saving to
disk” message may appear on the display while the
recorded data is being saved to the disk.
67
Song Playback & Recording
■
THE TRACK INDICATORS ...................................................................................................................................................
The track indicators above the track mode selectors indicate which tracks contain data and which
are muted. Tracks which do not contain data are
indicated by a dotted circle outline while tracks
which contain data have a solid outline. Play-enabled tracks are indicated by a filled circle while
tracks that are muted are indicated by an outline
only.
No data
Record-enabled
■
Muted
Play-enabled
TRACK DELETE ............................................................................................................................................................................
When the DEL LCD button is pressed DELETE
will appear for tracks which contain data. Select
DELETE via the TR1 through TR16 LCD dials
while holding the DEL button to delete all data in
the corresponding tracks. The data is actually deleted when the DEL LCD button is released. When
the DEL LCD button is pressed, tracks set to REC
will automatically be switched to PLAY or MUTE.
■
RECORDING & EFFECTS ...................................................................................................................................................
The reverb, chorus, and DSP effects are recorded
as follows:
68
REVERB
The last reverb type selected during recording takes priority. No effect type is recorded if the [REVERB] button is off during recording.
CHORUS
The chorus type is only recorded when the accompaniment or rhythm tracks are recorded. The
chorus type is recorded even if the [CHORUS] button is off during recording. The chorus type is
selected automatically according to the selected style.
DSP EFFECT
If the [DSP EFFECT] button is on during recording, the current DSP effect will be recorded only for
the tracks actually being recorded. If the [DSP EFFECT] button is off during recording or only the
accompaniment tracks are set to the REC mode, no change occurs. If the [DSP EFFECT] button is
turned on during manual track recording, however, only tracks set to the REC mode are effected.
Song Playback & Recording
■
PLAYBACK .........................................................................................................................................................................................
Recorded tracks are automatically set to the
PLAY mode when recording is stopped, so you can
simply press the START LCD button or the [START]
panel button to hear what you’ve recorded immediately after recording. All other playback functions
are the same as described on the “Song Playback”
section (page 53).
■
EXITING .................................................................................................................................................................................................
Press the [SONG RECORD] or [EXIT] button
to exit from the MULTITRACK RECORD mode
and return to the normal play mode.
SONG
PLAY
CUSTOM
VOICE EDIT
SONG
CUSTOM
RECORD ACCOMP. REC
FUNCTION
EXIT
DISK
Punch-In Recording
PUNCH IN recording allows only a section of a recorded track to be re-recorded without having to redo the entire
track.
Select the PUNCH IN display via the [ ] or [ ] LCD button to the right of the display.
NOTES
• If you require the metronome sound for punch-in recording turn the METRONOME parameter ON in the PUNCH
IN display. The metronome settings are available in the
MULTI REC mode.
Z Select a Track ...................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the TRACK LCD dials to select a track for
PUNCH IN recording: LEAD, RIGHT1, RIGHT2,
or LEFT. Only tracks which contain data can be
selected.
69
Song Playback & Recording
X Select a Start Trigger Type .................................................................................................................................................
Use the TRIGGER LCD dials to select the FIRST
KEY or START SW start trigger. When FIRST KEY
is selected recording will begin when the first key is
played on the keyboard. When START SW is selected recording will begin when the START LCD
button or panel [START/STOP] button is pressed.
If a footswitch has been assigned to the PUNCH IN/
OUT function via the F3 CONTROLLER: FOOT
CONTROLLER display (page 112), FOOT SW can
also be selected via the TRIGGER LCD dials.
C Turn the Metronome On If Required .......................................................................................................................
Use the METRONOME LCD dial to turn the
metronome ON if you want to record while monitoring the metronome sound (the metronome sound is
not recorded).
V Locate the Punch In Point ........................
While the PLAY mode is selected play the song
and pause playback a few measures before the
punch-in point so you have a good “lead in” prior to
actually starting recording.
B Engage the Record Mode ...................................................................................................................................................
Use the MODE LCD dials to select the REC
mode.
70
Song Playback & Recording
N Start Playback .................................................................................................................................................................................
Press the START LCD button or panel [START/
STOP] button to start playback from the current
PAUSE location.
M Start Recording at the Punch-in Point .................................................................................................................
Start recording at the punch-in point by either
pressing a START button, playing on the keyboard,
or pressing the footswitch, according to the start
trigger type selected in step 2, above.
< Stop Recording .............................................................................................................................................................................
Stop recording at the punch-out point by pressing the PUNCH OUT LCD button, the panel [START/
STOP] button, or the footswitch. If recording is
stopped via the panel [START/STOP] button, all
data following the punch-out point will be deleted.
If recording is stopped by using the PUNCH OUT
LCD button or footswitch, data following the punchout point will be left intact.
71
Song Playback & Recording
Track Volume Control
The MULTITRACK RECORD VOLUME display provides independent volume parameters for
each of the 16 tracks.
Select the VOLUME display via the [ ] or [ ]
LCD button to the right of the display, and use the
TR1 through TR16 LCD dials to set the volume of
the corresponding tracks. The TR1-8 or TR9-16
LCD button selects track groups 1 through 8 and 9
through 16, respectively. Press the EXECUTE LCD
button to save the edited volume data to disk.
Multitrack record Mode Edit Functions
The MULTITRACK RECORD mode EDIT display includes four functions: QUANTIZE, TRACK MIX,
INITIAL EDIT, and SONG DELETE.
Select the EDIT display via the [ ] LCD button to the right of the display, then use the s and t LCD buttons
to the left of the display to select the desired function.
■
QUANTIZE ...........................................................................................................................................................................................
The QUANTIZE function aligns recorded notes
in a specified track to the specified beats to “tighten
up” the timing of a performance.
One measure of 8th notes before quantization
After quantization
The Quantize sizes are:
1/4 note
1/16 note
1/4 note triplet
1/16 note triplet
1/8 note
1/32 note
1/8 note triplet
Z Select a Track
Use the TRACK LCD dials to select the track to
be quantized, and the SIZE LCD dials to select the
beats to which the notes will be aligned. Only tracks
which contain data will be available for quantization.
72
Song Playback & Recording
X Quantize the Track
Press the EXECUTE button. “Executing” will
appear on the display while the data is being quantized.
After quantization the EXECUTE button changes to
an UNDO button which can be used to undo the
quantize operation if the results are not satisfactory.
■
TRACK COPY/MIX ......................................................................................................................................................................
This function allows data to be copied from one track to another, or data from two tracks can be mixed and the
results placed in a different track.
● Copy
● Mix
Source track 1
Source track 1
Data
Data
Copy to Destination track
Source track 2
Data
Data
Destination track
Z Select the Source and Destination
Tracks
Use the SOURCE1 and SOURCE2 LCD dials to
specify the tracks to be mixed, and the DESTINATION LCD dials to select the track into which the
results will be placed. To simply copy from the
SOURCE1 track to the DESTINATION track select
COPY via the SOURCE2 LCD dials.
X Copy/Mix the Data
Press the EXECUTE button. “Executing” will
appear on the display while the data is being copied.
After execution the EXECUTE button changes to an
UNDO button which can be used to undo the copy/
mix operation if the results are not satisfactory.
73
Song Playback & Recording
■
INITIAL EDIT .....................................................................................................................................................................................
Allows the initial REVERB DEPTH, CHORUS DEPTH, and DSP EFFECT depth settings for each track to be
edited as required.
Z Select a Track & Set the Depth Parameters
Use the TRACK LCD dials to select a track, and
the REVERB, CHORUS, and EFFECT LCD dials to
set the corresponding depth parameters as required.
Only tracks which contain data can be selected for
editing.
X Enter the Edited Data
Press the EXECUTE button. “Executing” will
appear on the display while the data is being updated. After execution the EXECUTE button changes
to an UNDO button which can be used to undo the
initial edit operation if the results are not satisfactory.
NOTES
• INITIAL EDIT parameters cannot be edited for a track on
which the ORGAN FLUTE voice was recorded.
■
SONG DELETE ...............................................................................................................................................................................
This function deletes the specified song file from the disk.
NOTES
• The song currently being recorded cannot be deleted.
• The amount of remaining disk space is displayed in the
upper right corner of the display in approximate kilobytes
while recording or playback is stopped.
Z Select a Song
Use the SONG LCD dials to select the song to be
deleted.
NOTES
• If the optional hard disk is present, DIR ▲▼ dials will be
available which can be used to select the floppy disk or the
hard disk directory containing the song to be deleted.
X Delete the Song
Press the EXECUTE LCD button. The “Ready to
Delete ********. OK to delete?” confirmation
message will appear (“********” is the song name).
Press YES to delete the song or NO to cancel.
74
Custom Accompaniment
The CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT RECORD mode allows you to
create original accompaniment styles that can be later recalled and
played at any time, just like the presets. Up to 32 custom accompaniment styles can be maintained in internal memory at the same time,
and any number can be saved to disk for later reloading and use. 5
sections can be created for each custom style: MAIN A, MAIN B,
INTRO, FILL IN, and ENDING.
The basic custom style recording procedure is outlined below.
Z Engage the CUSTOM ACCOMP. RECORD Mode ......................................................................................
Press the [CUSTOM ACCOMP. RECORD]
button. The current [CUSTOM] style will begin
playing in the key of C major 7 and the REC mode
for the RHY1 track will be automatically engaged.
SONG
PLAY
CUSTOM
VOICE EDIT
SONG
CUSTOM
RECORD ACCOMP. REC
FUNCTION
DISK
X Select a Style ..........................................................
Select one of the [CUSTOM] styles or a preset
style that is close to the style you want to create.
Style selection is carried out in the normal way
(page 26).
NOTES
• If you select a different style after any data has been edited
a confirmation display will appear. This is necessary
because loading a new style will erase any edits you have
already made.
C Select the Section You Want to Record ...............................................................................................................
After making sure that the BASIC page is selected (use the [ ] LCD button to the right of the
display if necessary), press the SETTING LCD
button if it is showing to access the NAME, SECTION, and COPY parameters. Use the SECTION
LCD dials to select the section you want to program
first: MAIN A, MAIN B, INTRO, FILL IN, or
ENDING. The MAIN A section is initially selected.
75
Custom Accompaniment
V Copy the Data For the A or B Variation ...............................................................................................................
The COPY parameter makes it possible to copy
the A or B variation to the selected section, depending on the variation you want to program. The
possibilities are listed below:
SECTION
COPY SOURCE
MAIN A or B
MAIN A, MAIN B
INTRO
INTRO A, INTRO B
FILL IN
FILL AA, FILL AB, FILL BB, FILL BA
ENDING
ENDING A, ENDING B
Use the SOURCE LCD dials to select the section
to be copied to the current section. Press the EXECUTE button, then press YES to copy the data
when the confirmation display appears (or NO to
cancel).
B Enter a Style Name, If Necessary ..............................................................................................................................
You can enter an original name for the custom
accompaniment style at this point. Style names can
be up to 12 characters long. Use the < > LCD dial
to move the name cursor to the various character
positions, then use the A~Z, a~z or 0~9… LCD
dial to select the required character for each position. The A~Z LCD dial selects capital letters, the
a~z LCD dial selects lower-case letters, and the
0~9… LCD dial selects numbers and special characters.
N Go to the PART RECORD Display and Set Up the Tracks ...............................................................
Press the PART RECORD LCD button to go to
the PART RECORD display and use the LCD dials
to set the REC mode for the part you want to record.
Other parts can be play-enabled or muted as required. Parts which contain no data are automatically set to MUTE.
76
Custom Accompaniment
Parts can be cleared completely before recording
if you want to record “from scratch”, or change the
number of measures in the section, as described
below. When the DEL LCD button is pressed DELETE will appear for tracks which contain data.
Select DELETE via the track LCD dials while holding the DEL button to delete all data in the corresponding tracks. The data is actually deleted when
the DEL button is released.
The entire custom accompaniment style can be
cleared (in order to change the time signature, for
example) by using the CLEAR CUSTOM STYLE
function described on page 83.
M Change the Time Signature & Number Of Measures, If Required ..........................................
If you want to create a style in a different time
signature than the current style, or change the number
of measures in the selected section, use the ▼ LCD
button to the left of the display to select the MEASURE and BEAT parameters.
Use the BEAT LCD dials to select a different
time signature: 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, or 5/4. Please note that
the time signature can only be changed if all sections
of the current custom style have been cleared. If any
data remains in any section “All sections must be
clear to set beat” will appear in the BEAT parameter
position (use the CLEAR CUSTOM STYLE function described on page 83 to clear all sections of the
current custom style).
Use the MEASURE LCD dials to select a different number of measures for the selected section.
Please note that the number of measures can only be
changed if all parts of the current section have been
cleared. If any data remains in any part “All parts
must be clear to set measures” will appear in the
MEASURE parameter position (the parts can be
cleared as described in the previous step) Once the
parts have been cleared you can select a new number
of measures as required: 1 through 8.
Once the BEAT and/or MEASURE parameters
have been set as required, press the PART RECORD
button to the left of the display to go back to the
PART RECORD display.
77
Custom Accompaniment
< Record the Selected part ....................................................................................................................................................
You can now add new notes to the selected part
by playing the keyboard at the appropriate timing.
All parts must be entered in the key of C major 7. If
both the RHY1 and RHY2 parts are cleared the
metronome will sound to provide a timing guide (the
metronome sound is not recorded). A single drum
instrument can be cleared from the RHY1 and/or
RHY2 track by pressing the key corresponding to
the instrument to be cleared while holding the RHY
DIRECT CANCEL LCD button.
NOTES
• Key On/Off ,Voice , Volume , Pitch Bend and Modulation
data can be recorded.
• When the RHY1 or RHY2 part is selected the keyboard
percussion mode is automatically engaged. In this case
the drum kit voice can be changed via the RIGHT 1 voice
selectors. All voices in the [CUSTOM] group can be
selected — but only drum kit voices will sound.
• If a preset style or an SFF style loaded from disk is being
used unedited, or a part contains no data, REC will appear
in gray for all except the RHYTHM parts and the REC
mode cannot be selected. New data can be recorded for
such parts by first deleting all data from the part.
• Playback can be started and stopped via the [START/
STOP] button as required while in the CUSTOM ACCOMP.
RECORD mode — data cannot be recorded while playback is stopped. It is a good idea, however, to use
[SYNCHRO START] if you want to record from the top of
the first measure.
• The volume of the voice being edited can be adjusted by
pressing the [MIXER] button and using the R1 LCD dials.
• A “KEY OFF” event will automatically be recorded after the last
note in the accompaniment.
• If a custom accompaniment which includes an empty section is
saved to disk, the empty section will be replaced by a suitable
section when the accompaniment is later loaded and played.
> Repeat Until All Parts Have Been Recorded ..................................................................................................
Continue selecting the REC mode for the various
tracks and recording them as required until all parts
have been recorded.
? Set the Part Volume Levels ...............................................................................................................................................
Use the ▼ LCD button to the left of the display
to select the VOLUME parameters. Then use the
VOLUME OFFSET LCD dials to adjust the volume
of each part to create the best overall balance. Since
these are “offset” parameters, both “+” and “–”
settings are possible to increase or decrease the
volume from the preset level, respectively. These
settings apply to the corresponding parts in all
sections of the accompaniment.
78
Custom Accompaniment
[ Go On to EFFECTS, EDIT, and STORE ................................................................................................................
You can now stop the accompaniment by pressing the [START/STOP] button (or leave it running,
as required), and go on to the EFFECTS and EDIT
functions described below. When your custom accompaniment is complete, be sure to use the STORE
function, also described below, to store the style to
one of the CUSTOM memory locations.
Exit When Done .............................................................................................................................................................................
When your custom accompaniment is complete,
press the [CUSTOM ACCOMP. REC] or [EXIT]
button to exit from the CUSTOM ACCOMPANIMENT RECORD mode.
SONG
PLAY
CUSTOM
VOICE EDIT
SONG
CUSTOM
RECORD ACCOMP. REC
FUNCTION
EXIT
DISK
Effects
Select the EFFECTS display via the [ ] or [ ] LCD button to the right of the display. If not already selected,
press the SETTING LCD button to access the REVERB DEPTH, CHORUS TYPE/DEPTH, and PAN parameters for
the current section.
■
REVERB DEPTH ...........................................................................................................................................................................
Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to the left of the display
to select the REVERB DEPTH parameters, then use
the RHY1, RHY2, BASS, CHD1, CHD2, PAD,
PHR1, and PHR2 LCD dials to set the reverb depth
for the corresponding parts.
79
Custom Accompaniment
■
CHORUS TYPE & DEPTH ....................................................................................................................................................
Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to the left of the display
to select the CHORUS TYPE/DEPTH parameters.
To select a chorus type use the TYPE LCD button
to select the CHORUS TYPE display. Use the LCD
dials to select the desired chorus type.
To set the chorus depth parameters use the DEPTH
LCD button to select the CHORUS DEPTH display
(if it isn’t already selected). Use the RHY1, RHY2,
BASS, CHD1, CHD2, PAD, PHR1, and PHR2
LCD dials to set the chorus depth for the corresponding parts.
■
PAN .............................................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to the left of the display
to select the PAN parameters. Use the RHY1, RHY2,
BASS, CHD1, CHD2, PAD, PHR1, and PHR2
LCD dials to set the pan position for the corresponding parts.
NOTES
• The REVERB, CHORUS, and PAN parameters can not
be edited for parts which contain no data.
80
Custom Accompaniment
Edit
Select the EDIT display via the [ ] or [ ] LCD button to the right of the display. If not already selected, press
the SETTING LCD button to access the QUANTIZE, COPY, and REMOVE EVENT parameters. Use the ▲ and ▼
LCD buttons to the left of the display to select the desired function.
■
QUANTIZE ...........................................................................................................................................................................................
The QUANTIZE function aligns recorded notes
in a specified part to the specified beats to “tighten
up” the timing of a performance.
The Quantize sizes are:
1/4 note
1/16 note
1/4 note triplet
1/16 note triplet
Z Select a Part
1/8 note
1/32 note
Use the PART LCD dials to select the part to be
quantized, and the SIZE LCD dials to select the
beats to which the notes will be aligned.
The part name for parts which are being used
unedited from a preset style will appear in small
letters. “*” will appear for parts which contain no
data. Neither can be selected for quantization.
1/8 note triplet
X Quantize the Part
Press the EXECUTE button. The “Completed”
display will appear briefly when the quantize operation has finished. After quantization the EXECUTE
button changes to an UNDO button which can be
used to undo the quantize operation if the results are
not satisfactory.
■
COPY ........................................................................................................................................................................................................
This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the same
part.
Z Select a Part
Use the PART LCD dials to select the part to be
edited.
The part name for parts which are being used
unedited from a preset style will appear in small
letters. “*” will appear for parts which contain no
data. Neither can be selected for editing.
81
Custom Accompaniment
X Select the Top, Last, and Destination
Measures
Use the TOP and LAST LCD dials to specify the
first and last measures in the region to be copied.
Use the DEST LCD dial to specify the top of the
measure to which the data is to be copied.
C Copy the Data
Press the EXECUTE button. The “Completed”
display will appear briefly when the copy operation
has finished. After execution the EXECUTE button
changes to an UNDO button which can be used to
undo the copy operation if the results are not satisfactory.
■
REMOVE EVENT ...........................................................................................................................................................................
This function can be used to remove all occurrences of a specified type of event — VOLUME, PITCH BEND,
or MODULATION — from a specified part.
Z Select a Part
Use the PART LCD dials to select the part from
which a type of event is to be removed.
The part name for parts which are being used
unedited from a preset style will appear in small
letters. “*” will appear for parts which contain no
data. Neither can be selected for editing.
X Select an Event Type
Use the EVENT LCD dials to select the type of
event to be removed.
NOTES
• MODULATION events cannot be removed from the RHY1
and RHY2 parts.
C Remove the Specified Events
Press the EXECUTE button. “Completed” will
appear on the display briefly when the data has been
removed. After execution the EXECUTE button
changes to an UNDO button which can be used to
undo the copy operation if the results are not satisfactory.
82
Custom Accompaniment
Store/Clear
Select the STORE display via the [ ] LCD button to the right of the display. If not already selected, press
the SETTING LCD button to access the STORE and CLEAR CUSTOM STYLE parameters. Use the ▲ and ▼ LCD
buttons to the left of the display to select the desired function.
■
STORE .....................................................................................................................................................................................................
Stores the recorded custom accompaniment data for use with the PSR-7000 accompaniment feature. When this
function is selected the size of the current style and the remaining memory capacity available for style storage are
displayed to the right of the display. The names and sizes of all other styles currently in memory are shown in the
lower section of the display.
Z Select a Custom Style Number
Use the STORE LCD dials to select the custom
style number to which you want to store the newly
created custom style.
X Store the Custom Style
Press the EXECUTE button, then press YES to
store the style when the confirmation display appears (or NO to cancel).
■
CLEAR CUSTOM STYLE .....................................................................................................................................................
Clears unwanted custom styles from memory, making more memory available for custom style storage.
Z Select a Custom Style Number
Use the CLEAR LCD dials to select the custom
style you want to clear.
X Clear the Custom Style
Press the EXECUTE button, then press YES to
clear the style when the confirmation display appears (or NO to cancel).
NOTES
• If you change styles or exit from the CUSTOM ACCOMP.
REC mode before storing an edited style, a store confirmation display will appear. Press YES to store the data,
NO to exit without storing, or CANCEL to continue editing.
The YES button returns you to the STORE/CLEAR display.
83
Custom Voice Edit
This mode makes it possible to create new voices by editing some parameters of the preset voices. Wave data loaded from disk can also be edited to
create original voices.* A simple EASY EDIT mode and full-parameter FULL
EDIT mode are available. Both modes can be used to customize voice data
loaded from disk. Up to 32 custom voices can be retained in memory and selected via the RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT, and LEAD voice [CUSTOM] buttons.
* The wave data loaded automatically when the data disk supplied with the PSR-7000 is inserted (see page
96) is loaded into the CUSTOM VOICE memory. These custom voices can then be saved to a different
disk using the SAVE TO DISK function (page 98), reloaded, and edited as required to create original
voices.
NOTES
• Optional Yamaha “Sample Data Disks” can also be loaded via the DISK LOAD function (page
96).
• Not all disk titles are available in all areas.
• To load only custom voice data from the supplied disk, press the [DISK] button, press the
DISK LOAD LCD button, and then insert the disk.
Engaging the Easy/Full Edit Mode
Z Engage the CUSTOM VOICE EDIT Mode ............................................................................................................
Press the [CUSTOM VOICE EDIT] button to
engage the CUSTOM VOICE EDIT mode. The
CUSTOM VOICE EDIT display will appear.
SONG
PLAY
CUSTOM
VOICE EDIT
SONG
CUSTOM
RECORD ACCOMP. REC
X Select a Preset Voice ......................................
FUNCTION
DISK
Select the preset voice on which the custom
voice will be based via the PART, GROUP, and
VOICE LCD dials. The control below the large ▲
and ▼ symbols scrolls quickly through the voice list
while the control below the smaller ▲ and ▼ symbols
scroll more slowly.
C Select Easy or Full Edit ...............................
Press the EASY EDIT or FULL EDIT LCD
button to go to the corresponding mode. The EASY
EDIT mode cannot be selected when a drum kit
voice is selected for editing.
■
EXITING .................................................................................................................................................................................................
Exit from the CUSTOM VOICE EDIT mode
when done by pressing either the [CUSTOM VOICE
EDIT] or [EXIT] button.
NOTES
• If the edited data was not stored to disk before pressing
the [EXIT] button, the “Edited data not stored! Store data?”
confirmation will appear on the display. Pressing “YES”
will go to the STORE function, “NO” will exit from the
CUSTOM VOICE EDIT mode, or CANCEL will return to
the previous display.
84
SONG
PLAY
CUSTOM
VOICE EDIT
SONG
CUSTOM
RECORD ACCOMP. REC
FUNCTION
EXIT
DISK
Custom Voice Edit
The Easy Edit Parameters
Use the [ ] and [ ] LCD buttons to the right of the display to select the EDIT and STORE/CLEAR display
pages. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to the left of the display to select the various parameters within each page.
The COMPARE LCD button can be used during editing to compare the sound of the original voice with the edited
voice.
EDIT
■
NAME ........................................................................................................................................................................................................
A name of up to 12 characters can be entered for
each custom voice. Use the < > LCD dial to move
the name cursor to the various character positions,
then use the A~Z, a~z or 0~9… LCD dial to
select the required character for each position. The
A~Z LCD dial selects capital letters, the a~z LCD
dial selects lowercase letters, and the 0~9… LCD
dial selects numbers and special characters.
■
PAN ....................................................................................
The PAN LCD dial can be used to position the
voice in the center of the stereo sound field, or to the
left or right in 10 steps.
NOTES
• Depending upon the selected DSP EFFECT type, some
PAN parameters may not function.
■
VIBRATO ......................................................................
Use the DEPTH, SPEED and DELAY LCD dials
to set up the vibrato effect. DELAY produces a delay
between the time a key is pressed and the beginning
of the vibrato effect. “0” is the preset value for all
parameters. “+” settings increase while “–” settings
decrease the range of the effect.
TIME
85
Custom Voice Edit
■
TONE .........................................................................................................................................................................................................
The timbre of the voice can be varied via the
BRILLIANCE and RESONANCE LCD dials. “0”
is the preset value for both parameters. “+” BRILLIANCE settings produce a brighter sound, while
“+” RESONANCE settings produce a more “peaky”
sound.
ENVELOPE ................................................................
The ENVELOPE parameters affect the volume
envelope of the voice.
The ATTACK LCD dial sets the time it takes for
maximum level to be reached after a key is pressed.
“0” is the preset value. “+” settings produce a faster
attack.
The DECAY LCD dial sets the time it takes to
reach the sustain level after the maximum attack
level has been reached. “0” is the preset value. “+”
settings produce a faster decay.
The RELEASE LCD dial sets the time it takes for
the sound to diminish to zero after a key is released.
“0” is the preset value. “+” settings produce a faster
release.
NOTES
• An exclamation mark (!) will appear to the right of a
parameter when the maximum setting for that parameter
has been reached.
• These parameters may have different effects on different
voices.
86
LEVEL
■
TIME
KEY ON
KEY OFF
Custom Voice Edit
STORE/CLEAR
■
STORE .....................................................................................................................................................................................................
Stores the edited custom voice data in the specified custom voice memory location. When this function is selected
the size of the current voice and the remaining memory capacity available for voice storage are displayed to the right
of the display. The names and sizes of all other voices currently in memory are shown in the lower section of the
display.
Z Select a Custom Voice Number
Use the STORE LCD dials to select the custom
voice number to which you want to store the newly
created custom voice.
X Store the Custom Voice
Press the EXECUTE button, then press YES to
store the voice when the confirmation display appears (or NO to cancel).
■
CLEAR CUSTOM VOICE .......................................................................................................................................................
Clears unwanted custom voices from memory, making more memory available for custom voice storage.
Z Select a Custom Voice Number
Use the CLEAR LCD dials to select the custom
voice you want to clear.
X Clear the Custom Voice
Press the EXECUTE button, then press YES to
clear the voice when the confirmation display appears (or NO to cancel).
87
Custom Voice Edit
The Full Edit Parameters
The FULL EDIT mode can be entered as described on page 78. The FULL EDIT mode can be used to edit both
internal voices and voices in the custom voice group.
Use the [ ] and [ ] LCD buttons to the right of the display to select the E1:BASIC, E2:CONTROLLER,
E3:ENVELOPE, E4:EFFECTS and STORE/CLEAR display pages. Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to the left of the
display to select the various parameters within each page.
Many PSR-7000 orchestra voices are actually made up of two sounds “layered” together. Each of these layers
is called an “element”. SINGLE will appear in the upper left corner of the display when a 1-element voice is being
selected for editing, and DUAL will appear when a 2-element voice is selected. DRUM will appear when a drum kit
voice has been selected (drum kit voices are all single-element). When a 2-element voice which allows individual
editing of each element is selected the ELEMENT LCD button can be used to select the element to be edited: A or
B. The COMPARE LCD button can be used during editing to compare the sound of the original voice with the edited
voice.
E1:BASIC
■
NAME ........................................................................................................................................................................................................
A name of up to 12 characters can be entered for
each custom voice. Use the < > LCD dial to move
the name cursor to the various character positions,
then use the A~Z, a~z or 0~9… LCD dial to
select the required character for each position. The
A~Z LCD dial selects capital letters, the a~z LCD
dial selects lowercase letters, and the 0~9… LCD
dial selects numbers and special characters.
■
WAVE (except for the DRUM KITS) ...................
Use the WAVE ▲▼ LCD dials to select a wave.
The “wave” is the raw sound on which the voice is
based. 2-element voices use two waves. The PSR7000 has 656 waves in internal read-only memory.
External waves from custom voices loaded from
disk can also be used.
88
Custom Voice Edit
■
TUNE (except for the DRUM KITS) .............................................................................................................................................
These parameters adjust the pitch of the voice.
COARSE tunes in semitone steps and FINE tunes in
1-cent steps (a cent is 1/100th of a semitone). The
maximum COARSE range is from –24 to +24 semitones (plus or minus two octaves), and the maximum
FINE range is from –50 to +50 cents. Normal pitch
is produced when both parameters are set to “0”.
■
VOLUME (except for the DRUM KITS) ...........
Sets the element volume. The higher the value
the higher the volume.
■
KEY ON DELAY
(except for the DRUM KITS) .....................................
Sets the time before the envelope begins after a
key is pressed. The higher the value the longer the
delay.
■
PAN ....................................................................................
The PAN LCD dial can be used to position the
voice in the center of the stereo sound field, or to the
left or right in 10 steps.
NOTES
• Depending upon the selected DSP EFFECT type, some
PAN parameters may not function.
E2:CONTROLLER
■
PITCH BEND WHEEL ...............................................................................................................................................................
Use the PITCH LCD dials to set the maximum
PITCH BEND wheel range in semitone steps. The
maximum pitch bend wheel range is from 0 to 12
semitones.
89
Custom Voice Edit
■
MODULATION WHEEL ...........................................................................................................................................................
The PMD (phase modulation), AMD (amplitude modulation), and Q BIAS (resonance) LCD
dials set the corresponding modulation parameter.
“0” is the preset value. “+” settings increase the
maximum modulation depth while “–” settings decrease the maximum modulation depth achievable
with the modulation wheel. In the case of AMD,
moving the modulation wheel while a key is already
pressed will produce no effect. The effect will be
produced if the next key is pressed.
■
INITIAL TOUCH CURVE .........................................................................................................................................................
Use the ▲▼ LCD dials to select any of 6 keyboard touch response speed sensitivities: PIANO 1,
STRINGS, ORGAN, PIANO 2, WOOD WIND, or
E.PIANO. The OFFSET LCD dial sets the velocity
offset. “0” is the preset value.
■
AFTER TOUCH ................................................................................................................................................................................
The PITCH, PMD (phase modulation), AMD
(amplitude modulation), and Q BIAS (resonance)
LCD dials set the corresponding aftertouch parameter. “0” is the preset value. “+” settings increase the
maximum depth while “–” settings decrease the
maximum depth achievable with aftertouch response.
90
Custom Voice Edit
E3:ENVELOPE
AMPLITUDE ENVELOPE .....................................................................................................................................................
RATE
These parameters set the rate of output level
variation. Higher values produce faster variation.
ATTACK: Sets the speed of variation from key-on to
the maximum attack level.
DECAY1, DECAY2, DECAY3: Set the speed of variation between the maximum attack level and the
levels set by the LEVEL DECAY1, DECAY2, and
DECAY3 parameters, respectively.
RELEASE1: Sets the rate of variation from the level at
key-release to level 0 when SUSTAIN is off.
SUSTAIN: Sets the rate of variation from the level at
key-release to level 0 when SUSTAIN is on.
LEVEL
The AMPLITUDE ENVELOPE LCD dials are
used to set the amplitude envelope RATE and LEVEL
parameters. Use the RATE or LEVEL LCD button to
select the corresponding group of parameters.
TIME
LEVEL
■
e.g. Some PIANO voice can be
assigned in this point.
TIME
LEVEL
These parameters sets the envelope output level.
Higher values produce higher output.
The ATTACK level is fixed at maximum and cannot be
changed.
DECAY1, DECAY2, DECAY3: Set the levels after
DECAY1, DECAY2, and DECAY3 variation.
91
Custom Voice Edit
■
FILTER .....................................................................................................................................................................................................
The FILTER ENVELOPE LCD dials are used to
set the filter envelope RATE and LEVEL parameters. Use the RATE or LEVEL LCD button to select
the corresponding group of parameters.
RATE
Set the rate of cutoff frequency variation. Higher
values produce faster variation.
ATTACK: Sets the speed of variation from key-on
(BRILLIANCE LEVEL) to the level set by the
ATTACK LEVEL parameter.
DECAY1, DECAY2, DECAY3: Set the speed of variation between the attack level and the levels set by
the LEVEL DECAY1, DECAY2, and DECAY3 parameters, respectively.
RELEASE1: Sets the rate of variation from the level at
key-release to the level set by the LEVEL RELEASE1 parameter when SUSTAIN is off.
RELEASE2: Sets the rate of variation from the level
set by the LEVEL RELEASE1 parameter to that set
LEVEL
These parameters set the amount of variation
from the preset cutoff frequency. Level “0” is the
preset value.
ATTACK: Sets the attack level after key-on.
DECAY1, DECAY2, DECAY3: Set the levels after
DECAY1, DECAY2, and DECAY3 variation.
RELEASE1, RELEASE2: Set the levels after RATE
RELEASE1 and RELEASE2 variation after keyrelease when SUSTAIN is off.
SUSTAIN: Sets the level after RATE SUSTAIN variation after key-release when SUSTAIN is on.
BRILLIANCE: Sets the brilliance level.
RESONANCE (CUTOFF [Hz])
ATACK
RATE
DECAY1 RATE
DECAY2 RATE
by the LEVEL RELEASE2 parameter when SUSTAIN
is off.
SUSTAIN: Sets the rate of variation from the level at keyrelease to the level set by the LEVEL SUSTAIN parameter when SUSTAIN is on.
RESONANCE: Sets the amount of emphasis at the cutoff
frequency (resonance).
NOTES
• If DRUM kit is selected , SUSTAIN parameters in the AMPLITUDE ENVELOPE or FILTER ENVELOPE cannot be changed.
• Some parameter settings may have minimal or no effect with
some voices.
DECAY3 RATE
RELEASE1 RATE
RELEASE2 RATE
SUSTAIN RATE
SUSTAIN
LEVEL
DECAY3
LEVEL
DECAY2
LEVEL
DECAY1 LEVEL
ATTACK LEVEL
RELEASE2
LEVEL
KEY OFF
RELEASE1
LEVEL
BRILLIANCE
KEY ON
* Higher rate values produce faster variation.
92
Custom Voice Edit
E4:EFFECTS
■
LFO .............................................................................................................................................................................................................
The LFO parameters set the LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) to produce cyclic pitch and amplitude modulation.
PMD: Sets the phase modulation depth. Higher
values produce deeper modulation.
AMD: Sets the amplitude modulation depth. Higher
values produce deeper modulation.
SPEED: Sets the speed of LFO variation.
WAVE: Sets the waveform of the LFO: TRI (triangular) or SAW (sawtooth).
■
DELAY VIB ..................................................................
Delay Vibrato is a vibrato effect based on LFO
modulation which has a variable delay between the
time a key is played and the beginning of the vibrato
effect.
TIME: Sets the delay between key-on and the beginning of LFO modulation. No delay is produced
when TIME is set to its minimum value. In this
case, only normal vibrato is produced (this has no
relation to the RATE value).
RATE: Sets the rate at which LFO phase modulation is
applied after the delay time — i.e. how long it takes
to reach maximum modulation level after modulation begins. The AMD has no RATE parameters.
■
REVERB DEPTH ...........................................................................................................................................................................
Sets the depth of the reverb effect. The higher the
value the greater the reverb depth.
■
CHORUS DEPTH .................................................
Sets the depth of the chorus effect. The higher the
value the greater the chorus depth.
■
DSP EFFECT ...........................................................
Use the TYPE LCD dials to select a DSP EFFECT type, and the DEPTH LCD dial to set the
depth of the selected DSP effect. For some DSP
effect types the DEPTH parameter is fixed at “100”
and cannot be changed.
NOTES
• Depending upon the selected DSP EFFECT type, some
PAN parameters may not function.
93
Custom Voice Edit
■
LEAD EFFECT .................................................................................................................................................................................
Use the TYPE LCD dials to select a DSP EFFECT type for the LEAD voice, and the DEPTH
LCD dial to set the depth of the selected effect. The
effect of these parameters can monitored while
editing if the lead voice was initially selected in the
ORIGINAL VOICE display.
STORE/CLEAR
■
STORE .....................................................................................................................................................................................................
Stores the edited custom voice data in the specified custom voice memory location. When this function is selected
the size of the current voice and the remaining memory capacity available for voice storage are displayed to the right
of the display. The names and sizes of all other voices currently in memory are shown in the lower section of the
display.
Z Select a Custom Voice Number
Use the STORE LCD dials to select the custom
voice number to which you want to store the newly
created custom voice.
X Store the Custom Voice
Press the EXECUTE button, then press YES to
store the voice when the confirmation display appears (or NO to cancel).
■
CLEAR CUSTOM VOICE .......................................................................................................................................................
Clears unwanted custom voices from memory,
making more memory available for custom voice
storage.
Z Select a Custom Voice Number
Use the CLEAR LCD dials to select the custom
voice you want to clear.
X Clear the Custom Voice
Press the EXECUTE button, then press YES to
clear the voice when the confirmation display appears (or NO to cancel).
94
Custom Voice Edit
The Drum Kit Edit Mode
When a drum kit voice is selected for editing the
parameters and functions available are essentially
the same as those for the orchestra voices in the
FULL EDIT mode. Many parameters of individual
percussion voices within the DRUM KIT can be
edited independently.
The only differences are in the E1:BASIC display:
● Use the PERCUSSION parameter function to
select the desired percussion sound for editing.
Pressing any key on the keyboard will directly
select that keys percussion sound.
● The drum kit voices have no VOLUME or KEY
ON DELAY parameters.
● The PITCH parameter functions in the same way
as the TUNE FINE parameter provided for the
orchestra voices.
The E2:CONTROLLER, E3:ENVELOPE,
E4:EFFECTS, and STORE/CLEAR display parameters and functions are the same as in the orchestra
voice FULL EDIT mode.
NOTES
• Some parameters may not effect the drum kit voices in
exactly the same way as the orchestra voices.
• Some settings may result in no sound, depending on the
drum kit voice and parameter.
• The SUSTAIN parameter cannot be changed in the E3
setting.
95
Disk Operations
The PSR-7000 [DISK] button accesses a range of functions that are used
for storage and retrieval of floppy disk data. The PSR-7000 can also be fitted with an optional internal hard disk for massive on-line storage capacity.
Consult your Yamaha dealer for details on hard disk installation. To select a
disk operation first press the [DISK] button, then press the LCD button corresponding to the operation you want to perform.
SONG
PLAY
CUSTOM
VOICE EDIT
SONG
CUSTOM
RECORD ACCOMP. REC
FUNCTION
DISK
NOTES
• Please note that no other PSR-7000 functions will operate while a disk
function is in progress.
• For any disk operation an appropriate floppy disk must first be properly
inserted into the PSR-7000 disk drive. The PSR-7000 uses only 3.5"
2DD and 2HD type floppy disks. Make sure the disk write protect tab
is set to the “write enable” position if you intend to save any data to the
disk, and insert the disk with the sliding disk cover facing the disk drive
and the disk label facing upward. Before a new disk can be used to
save data, it must be formatted using the “FORMAT FD” function
described on page 102.
• If you select a disk function when no disk is present in the drive, the
“No disk! Please insert a disk.” error message will appear on the
display.
Write protect tab
closed (unlocked
— write enabled)
Load From Disk
Loads the specified file from a floppy disk inserted into the PSR-7000 disk drive, or the optional hard disk.
If the FILE LIST display shown to the right is
not showing, press the LIST LCD button to select it.
Use the FILE LCD dials to select the file to load.
The name of the selected file is displayed to the right
of the file number, and the size of the file appears to
the right of the file name in kilobytes (approximate).
If a hard disk is present the DIR ▲▼ dials will
be available, and are used to select the directory
containing the desired file.
If you want to select a specific type of data to
load, press the PROGRAM LCD button.
96
Disk Operations
The LCD dials can now be used to select the
type(s) of data to be loaded from the selected file.
Data types which are turned ON are loaded.
SETUP
All setup data — see list on page 140.
STYLE
REVOICE
All STYLE REVOICE settings - page
116.
MULTI
PAD
All MULTI PAD phrase, percussion,
and chord data - page 42.
ORGAN
FLUTE
All ORGAN FLUTE voice data —
page 16.
REGISTRATION
All REGISTRATION memory data page 140.
CUSTOM
STYLE
All CUSTOM STYLE data - page 75.
CUSTOM
VOICE
All CUSTOM VOICE data - page 84.
Press the LIST LCD button when you want to go
back to the FILE LIST display.
If you want to load an individual registration,
style, or voice, press the INDIVIDUAL LCD button.
In the INDIVIDUAL LOAD display use the
DATA LCD dial to select REGIST, STYLE or VOICE,
the CONTENT LCD dials to select the individual file
to be loaded, and the DEST. REGIST, CUSTOM
STYLE, or CUSTOM VOICE LCD dials to select
the destination for the selected individual file.
When the INDIVIDUAL mode is selected and
STYLE is selected for loading, a PRE-LOAD LISTEN LCD button appears which lets you listen to the
style before actually loading it. The PRE-LOAD
LISTEN function will not work if there is too much
style data, however.
Press the LIST LCD button when you want to go
back to the FILE LIST display.
When the file and data types have been specified,
press the EXECUTE LCD button to actually begin
the load operation — the “OK to load?” confirmation display will appear.
If you want to execute the load operation press
the YES LCD button (or press the NO LCD button
to cancel the operation). “Don’t remove disk” will
appear while the data is being loaded, and the
progress of the load operation will be indicated by a
bar graph on the display.
NOTES
• Data spanning two or more disks (i.e. “split” data) cannot be
loaded using the INDIVIDUAL LOAD function.
• When loading CUSTOM STYLE or CUSTOM VOICE data — not
in the INDIVIDUAL mode — all data will be loaded even if the
loaded file contains empty styles or voices.
• SFF (optional style file format) disks can also be loaded when
using the custom style load function.
97
Disk Operations
Save To Disk
Saves the data listed below to a floppy disk inserted into the PSR-7000 disk drive, or to the optional hard disk.
NOTES
• If an unformatted disk or a disk which has not been
formatted for use with the PSR-7000 is inserted, the
“Wrong disk type or format! Format disk?” confirmation
message will appear when the SAVE TO DISK function is
selected. Press YES to format the disk or NO to cancel.
If the FILE LIST display shown to the right is
not showing, press the LIST LCD button to select it.
Use FILE LCD dials to select the file to which you
want to save the data.
If a hard disk is present the DIR ▲▼ dials will
be available, and are used to select the directory to
which the file is to be saved.
The file list at the bottom of the display includes
all files which currently exist on the disk and one
“*** NEW ***” file. Select an existing file if you
want to overwrite the file with the new data, or select
the “*** NEW ***” file if you want to create a new
file. With the exception of the “*** NEW ***” file,
the size of each file will appear to the right of the file
name in kilobytes (approximate).
If you want to specify the type(s) of data to be
saved, press the PROGRAM LCD button.
The ▲ and ▼ LCD buttons to the left of the
display can now be used to select various groups of
data, and the LCD dials can be used to select the
individual type(s) of data to be saved to the selected
file. Data types which are turned ON are saved.
98
SETUP
All setup data — see list on page 140.
STYLE REVOICE
All STYLE REVOICE settings - page 116.
MULTI PAD
All MULTI PAD phrase, percussion, and chord data - page 42.
ORGAN FLUTE
All ORGAN FLUTE voice data — page 16.
REGISTRATION BANK
The ▲ and ▼ LCD buttons select REGISTRATION memory bank groups 1… 8 and 9 …
16. The LCD dials turn the individual banks within the selected group ON or OFF.
CUSTOM STYLE
The ▲ and ▼ LCD buttons select CUSTOM STYLE memory groups 1… 8, 9…16,17...24
or 25...32. The LCD dials turn the individual custom style within the selected group ON or
OFF.
CUSTOM VOICE
The ▲ and ▼ LCD buttons select CUSTOM VOICE memory groups 1… 8, 9 … 16, 17 …
24, or 25 … 32. The LCD dials turn the individual custom voice within the selected group
ON or OFF.
SONG SETUP
Determines whether the above data will be loaded before song playback is started in the
SONG PLAY mode.
Disk Operations
Press the LIST LCD button when you want to go
back to the FILE LIST display.
When the file and data types have been specified,
press the EXECUTE LCD button to actually begin
the save operation — the confirmation display shown
to the right will appear.
If you want to give the file to be saved an original
file name, be sure to do so before pressing the YES
LCD button. File names can be up to 8 characters
long. Use the < > LCD dial to move the name
cursor to the various character positions, then use
the A~Z or 0~9… LCD dial to select the required
character for each position. The A~Z LCD dial
selects capital letters and the 0~9… LCD dial
selects numbers and special characters.
When you’re ready to execute the save operation
press the YES LCD button (or press the NO LCD
button to cancel the operation). “Don’t remove disk”
will appear while the data is being saved, and the
progress of the save operation will be indicated by a
bar graph on the display.
NOTES
• When the amount of data to be saved exceeds the remaining
disk space, the following message will appear in the display.
Not enough disk space!
Press [RD] to reduce the amount of data;
[CD] to use a different disk;
or [SP] to split the data into more than one file.
(Split data can not be loaded individually.)
• “AUTO LXXX” (X=any character) or a name consisting of all
spaces are not permitted as a file names. If spaces are used as
a file name they will automatically be changed to the underline
character “ _ ”.
• If a hard disk is present, data load and save operations can be
speeded up by organizing your data in separate directories.
Rename File/Song
Allows the name of the specified user-recorded song or user file to be changed as required.
Press the SONG LCD button to if the SONG
LIST is not showing in order to rename a song file,
or the USER FILE LCD button if the USER FILE
LIST is not showing in order to rename a user file.
Use the FILE or SONG LCD dials to select the file
you want to rename.
If a hard disk is present the DIR ▲▼ dials will
be available, and are used to select the directory
containing the file to be renamed.
The name of the selected file is displayed to the
right of the file number, and the size of the file
appears to the right of the file name in kilobytes
(approximate).
99
Disk Operations
The LISTEN LCD button which appears when
the SONG LIST is selected can be used to listen to
the currently selected song — press LISTEN again
to stop playback when done.
When the user or song file to be renamed has
been selected, press the EXECUTE LCD button.
The following display will appear.
Song file names can be up to 12 characters long
and user file names can be up to 8 characters long.
Use the < > LCD dial to move the name cursor to
the various character positions, then use the A~Z or
0~9… LCD dial to select the required character for
each position. The A~Z LCD dial selects capital
letters and the 0~9… LCD dial selects numbers
and special characters. When a song file is selected
the “a~z” LCD dial is also available for lower-case
character entry.
When the file and file name have been specified,
press the YES LCD button to actually begin the
rename operation (or press the NO LCD button to
cancel the operation). “Don’t remove disk” will
appear while the file is being renamed.
NOTES
• User file names which already exist cannot be entered.
100
Disk Operations
Delete File/Song
Deletes the specified song or user file from the disk.
Press the SONG LCD button to if the SONG
LIST is not showing in order to delete a song file, or
the USER FILE LCD button if the USER FILE
LIST is not showing in order to delete a user file.
Use the FILE or SONG LCD dials to select the file
you want to delete.
If a hard disk is present the DIR ▲▼ dials will
be available, and are used to select the directory
containing the file to be deleted.
The name of the selected file is displayed to the
right of the file number, and the size of the file
appears to the right of the file name in kilobytes
(approximate).
The LISTEN LCD button which appears when
the SONG LIST is selected can be used to listen to
the currently selected song — press LISTEN again
to stop playback when done.
When the file to be deleted has been selected,
press the EXECUTE LCD button. The “OK to delete?” display will appear.
If you want to execute the delete operation press
the YES LCD button (or press the NO LCD button
to cancel the operation). “Don’t remove disk” will
appear while the file is being deleted.
NOTES
• Files deleted from disk can not be restored (there is no
“Undo” function), so be sure you’ve selected the right file
before actually executing the delete operation.
101
Disk Operations
Format FD
Formats a floppy disk for use with the PSR-7000.
After inserting a new floppy disk into the disk
drive, press the EXECUTE LCD button to actually
begin the format operation — the “OK to format?”
confirmation display will appear.
If you want to execute the format operation press
the YES LCD button (or press the NO LCD button
to cancel the operation). “Don’t remove disk” will
appear while the disk is being formatted, and the
progress of the format operation will be indicated by
a bar graph on the display.
NOTES
• The PSR-7000 uses only 3.5" 2DD or 2HD type floppy
disks.
• Formatting a disk completely erases all data on the disk,
so be sure that the disk you’re formatting does not contain
important data!
Song Copy
This function can be used to copy songs recorded on the PSR-7000 to a different number/name on the same
floppy disk, or from one floppy disk to another. If the optional hard disk is present songs can be copied to a
different hard disk directory. A perfect way to make backup copies of important songs.
If the SONG LIST display shown to the right is
not showing, press the SOURCE LCD button to
select it. Use the SONG LCD dials to select the file
to copy.
If a hard disk is present the DIR ▲▼ dials will
be available, and are used to select the directory
containing the file to be copied.
The name of the selected file is displayed to the
right of the file number, and the size of the file
appears to the right of the file name in kilobytes
(approximate). The LISTEN LCD button can be
used to listen to the currently selected source song
— press LISTEN again to stop playback when done.
102
Disk Operations
When the source song has been selected press the
DESTINATION LCD button and use the DIR ▲▼
LCD dials to select the destination disk. Select
“another FD” to copy to a different floppy disk,
or “FLOPPY DISK” to copy to the same floppy
disk.
Press the EXECUTE LCD button to begin the
copy operation. At this point the display shown
below will appear and you will have a chance to
change the song name before it is copied.
If a hard disk is present the DIR ▲▼ dials will
be available, and are used to select the directory.
If you want to give the file to be copied an
original file name, be sure to do so before pressing
the YES LCD button. File names can be up to 12
characters long. Use the < > LCD dial to move the
name cursor to the various character positions, then
use the A~Z or 0~9… LCD dial to select the
required character for each position. The A~Z LCD
dial selects capital letters and the 0~9… LCD dial
selects numbers and special characters.
When you’re ready to execute the copy operation
press the YES LCD button (or press the NO LCD
button to cancel the operation). “Don’t remove disk”
will appear while the data is being copied. If you’re
copying to a different floppy disk the PSR-7000 will
prompt when to insert the copy destination disk.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
103
Disk Operations
HD Utility
This item will only appear when the optional hard disk
is present. The HD Utility functions include hard disk
directory management, formatting, and diagnostics.
Use the ▲ and ▼ buttons to the left of the display to
select the desired function.
NOTES
• Make regular backup copies of important data on floppy disks,
and store the backup disks in a safe location. Use the SONG
COPY function to copy song data from the optional internal hard
disk to floppy disk. Other data must first be loaded from the hard
disk and then saved to floppy disk.
• YAMAHA provides no guarantee against disk damage.
■
DIRECTORY EDIT ........................................................................................................................................................................
Allows hard disk directories to be renamed, created, and deleted.
● RENAME
To change a directory name use the DIR ▲▼
dials to select the directory, use the < and > dials to
move the cursor to the characters you want to change,
then use the A~Z, a~z, and 0~9… dials to enter
the desired characters. When the new name has been
entered as required press the RENAME button, then
press the YES confirmation button to execute the
rename operation.
● MAKE
Organizing your data in separate directories can
generally speed up the data load and save operations. To make a new directory, first create a name
for a directory with the default name “*** NEW
***”, as described under “RENAME”, above. When
the name for the new directory has been entered
press the MAKE button, then press the YES confirmation button to execute the make directory operation.
104
Disk Operations
● DELETE
To delete a directory use the DIR ▲▼ dials to
select the directory to be deleted. Press the DELETE
button, then press the YES confirmation button to
execute the delete operation. Please note that directories which contains files cannot be deleted — all
files in the directory must be deleted first.
NOTES
• The last remaining hard disk directory cannot be deleted.
■
HD FORMAT ......................................................................................................................................................................................
To format the hard disk press the EXECUTE
button, then press the YES confirmation button to
execute the format operation. The progress of the
format operation will be shown by a bar-graph
indicator on the display.
• Formats an internal hard disk for use with the PSR7000. Any previous data on the disk will be completely
erased by the format operation.
■
CHECK ....................................................................................................................................................................................................
Performs a check on the internal hard disk. Be
sure to save all important data to floppy disk before
executing the CHECK operation.
To check the disk press the EXECUTE button.
“Are you sure?” will appear on the display. Press the
YES button to execute the check operation (this may
take a while). If any errors are detected appropriate
messages will be shown on the display.
105
The PSR-7000 “Functions”
The PSR-7000 [FUNCTION] button selects 8 groups of functions
that access a number of related parameters. Here’s a list of the functions and the manual page numbers on which they are described in
detail.
[F1] SCALE (ARABIC)/VOICE PART .................................................. 108
[F2] SPLIT POINT/ABC MODE/MULTI PAD ....................................... 110
[F3] CONTROLLER .............................................................................112
[F4] STYLE REVOICE .......................................................................... 116
[F5] REVERB/CHORUS/DSP EFFECT ............................................... 118
[F6] HARMONY/REGISTRATION ........................................................ 122
[F7] UTILITY .........................................................................................123
[F8] MIDI ...............................................................................................124
General Function Selection & Editing Procedure
Press the [FUNCTION] button to engage the function mode.
SONG
PLAY
CUSTOM
VOICE EDIT
SONG
CUSTOM
RECORD ACCOMP. REC
Each of the function groups is selected by pressing the corresponding LCD button. In some cases all
of the parameters included in a function group will
be available in a single display “page”, and the
various parameters can be accessed via the ▲ and ▼
LCD buttons — as in the F3: CONTROLLER display, below.
106
FUNCTION
DISK
The PSR-7000 “Functions”
In cases where the number of parameters included in the function group is too large to fit on a
single display page, several pages may be available,
and
LCD buttons.
selectable via the
In all cases the selected parameter can be edited
via the appropriated labeled or positioned LCD
dials.
■
The [EXIT] Button .......................................................................................................................................................................
The [EXIT] or [FUNCTION] button can be
used at any time to exit from a function and return to
the function menu. Pressing the [EXIT] or [FUNCTION] button while the FUNCTION MENU is
showing will return you to the normal play mode.
EXIT
107
F1: Scale (Arabic)/Voice Part
The PSR-7000 has a range of advanced tuning and other voicerelated functions which are all included in the F1 function group.
■
SCALE (ARABIC) .........................................................................................................................................................................
Selects either the normal equal temperament scale
or an “arabic” scale in which each note can be tuned
over a 127-cent range.
Use the SCALE LCD dials to select either the
EQUAL TEMPERAMENT or ARABIC scale.
When the ARABIC scale is selected you can use
the TUNE NOTE LCD dials to select the note you
want to tune (the selected note will be highlighted in
the graphic keyboard in the upper section of the
display), then use the large ▲ and ▼ LCD dial to
coarse-tune the selected key in 25-cent steps, and
the small ▲ and ▼ LCD dial to fine-tune the selected
note in 1-cent steps. The tuning range is from “–64”
through “0” to “+63”. Each increment equals one
cent (one “cent” is one hundredth of a semitone).
The current tuning of each note is shown in the
corresponding key of the graphic keyboard display.
■
VOICE PART ......................................................................................................................................................................................
● SCALE CURVE
Selects one of three overall scale curves for the
PSR-7000 keyboard: FLAT, PIANO 1, or PIANO 2.
The FLAT curve corresponds precisely to “normal”
tuning, and is generally used in most electronic
instruments, the PIANO 1 and PIANO 2 curves
simulate the slight tuning variations that most piano
tunes use to give a piano a slightly warmer or richer
sound. Please note that the scale curve does not
apply to the ORGAN voices.
Use the SCALE CURVE LCD dials to select the
desired scale curve.
108
F1: Scale (Arabic)/Voice Part
● PART TUNE
Individual tuning parameters are provided for
the LEFT, RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEAD, and ORGAN voices, allowing each voice to be tuned over a
±100-cent range.
When the AUTO mode is selected, part tuning is
automatic and the individual parts cannot be tuned
manually. To tune manually, first use the MODE
LCD dial to select the MANUAL mode, then use the
LEFT, R1, R2, LEAD, or ORGAN LCD dial to tune
the corresponding voice as required. The current
tuning value for each part is shown next to the PART
TUNE parameter in the upper section of the display.
● OCTAVE
Shifts the pitch of the LEFT, RIGHT 1, RIGHT
2, LEAD, or ORGAN voice up one octave (“+1”) or
down one octave (“–1”). A setting of “0” produces
the normal pitch for that voice. Use the LEFT, R1,
R2, LEAD, or ORGAN LCD dial to set as required.
NOTES
• These parameters are also available in the Octave Change
function — page 22.
• Some voices may exhibit sudden pitch changes in the
highest and lowest ranges of the keyboard when shifted
up or down by an octave. The pitch bend wheel may also
cause sudden pitch changes.
● PAN
Sets the apparent position of the LEFT, RIGHT
1, RIGHT 2, LEAD, or ORGAN voice in the stereo
sound field. The graphic display indicates the approximate location of the sound between the left and
right speakers. Use the LEFT, R1, R2, LEAD, or
ORGAN LCD dial to set as required.
109
F2: Split Point/ABC Mode/Multi Pad
The F2 functions all pertain to the PSR-7000’s accompaniment features — i.e. the accompaniment split point, the ABC mode, and the
multi-pad repeat and chord match modes.
■
SPLIT POINT/ABC MODE ...................................................................................................................................................
● SPLIT POINT
The PSR-7000 has two programmable split points
— one which divides the LEFT and RIGHT/LEAD/
ORGAN orchestra parts (page 20), and one which
divides the auto-accompaniment and manual sections of the keyboard when AUTO BASS CHORD
accompaniment is engaged (page 31). The former is
indicated by the “L” marker and the latter by the “A”
marker above the graphic keyboard. The current
split points are indicated on the display both by the
split markers and the “splits” in the graphic keyboard. The “L” split point only appears on the
graphic keyboard display when the LEFT orchestra
part is on, and the “A” split point only appears when
the AUTO BASS CHORD auto accompaniment
feature is on.
The split points can be set in two ways: either use
the SPLIT POINT A and SPLIT POINT L LCD
dials, or press the desired key on the keyboard while
holding the A or L DIRECT SETTING LCD button
(or vice-versa). The new split point will be indicated
on the graphic keyboard in the LCD.
● ABC MODE
Use the ABC MODE LCD dials to select the
SINGLE FINGER, FINGERED 1, FINGERED 2,
FULL KEYBOARD, AUTO MIDI BASS, or
MANUAL MIDI BASS mode. If you select the
MANUAL MIDI BASS mode, and press the BASS
VOICE LCD button which appears, you can use the
GROUP and ▲/▼ LCD dials to specify the bass
voice to be used. Press the ABC MODE LCD button
to return to the ABC MODE display as required.
110
F2: Split Point/ABC Mode/Multi Pad
■
MULTI PAD ..........................................................................................................................................................................................
The repeat and chord match settings for PHRASE/CHORD MULTI PAD playback can be accessed
via this display. The repeat and chord match parameters can be accessed by pressing the REPEAT or
CHORD MATCH LCD button.
● REPEAT
When a check mark appears in a REPEAT box in
the MULTI PAD display, the corresponding pad —
PHRASE or CHORD — will playback repeatedly
until stopped by either pressing the same MULTI
PAD again, or by pressing the [REC/STOP] button.
Use the LCD dials to turn repeat for the corresponding pads ON or OFF as required.
NOTES
• The default repeat settings are: pads 1…4 OFF; pads
5…8 ON.
● CHORD MATCH
When a check mark appears in a CHORD MATCH
box in the MULTI PAD display, the phrase played
by the corresponding PHRASE pad will be automatically re-harmonized to match the accompaniment chords if the PHRASE pad is played while
AUTO BASS CHORD accompaniment is playing.
Use the LCD dials to turn the chord match
function for the corresponding pads ON or OFF as
required.
NOTES
• The chord match function is only available for pads 1
through 4 (the PHRASE pads).
• The default chord match settings are: 1 & 2 OFF; 3 & 4 ON.
111
F3: Controller
The F3 function group includes a range of functions that affect how
the PSR-7000 responds to control via the keyboard, a foot controller
plugged into the rear-panel FOOT VOLUME jack, footswitches
plugged into the rear-panel FOOT SW jacks, the [SUSTAIN] button,
the PITCH BEND wheel, and the MODULATION wheel.
■
FOOT CONTROLLER ...............................................................................................................................................................
● VOLUME
Determines whether an optional YAMAHA FC7
Foot Controller plugged into the rear-panel FOOT
VOLUME jack will control master volume, or only
the volume of specified parts and voices.
Use the TYPE LCD dial to select VOLUME for
master volume control or INDIVIDUAL for individual part/voice volume control.
Individual part and voice assignment parameters
for the M.PAD, ACMP, LEFT, R1, R2, LEAD, and
ORGAN parts are available when the INDIVIDUAL
type is selected. Use the corresponding LCD dials to
turn volume control for the corresponding parts ON
or OFF as required.
NOTES
• Normally you’ll want to be able to apply expression control
to the orchestra voices without affecting the accompaniment and rhythm sound, so the INDIVIDUAL type should
be selected and the voices you want to control turned on
while the remaining parts are turned off.
● SW1 (FOOTSWITCH 1) &
SW2 (FOOTSWITCH 2)
Determine the functions of footswitches plugged
into the rear-panel FOOT SWITCH 1 and FOOT
SWITCH 2 jacks, and to which of the PSR-7000
voices the footswitches will apply.
Use the TYPE LCD dials to select one of the
following footswitch functions:
112
F3: Controller
When the SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, or SOFT
type is selected, use the LEFT, R1, R2, and LEAD
LCD dials to turn footswitch control for the corresponding parts ON or OFF as required.
The SUSTAIN type can be independently assigned to the ORGAN voice.
NOTES
• The sustain effect is applied to the specified orchestra
part(s) only when the panel [SUSTAIN] button is turned on
or when the sustain pedal is pressed.
• The panel [SUSTAIN] button will not function while a
footswitch to which the sustain effect is assigned is used.
SUSTAIN
Standard sustain footswitch operation. When the footswitch is pressed notes played have a
long sustain. Releasing the footswitch immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes.
SOSTENUTO
If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the footswitch while the note(s) are
held, those notes will be sustained as long as the footswitch is held (as if the damper pedal
had been pressed) but all subsequently played notes will not be sustained. This makes it
possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played “staccato.”
SOFT
Pressing the footswitch subtly reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes
played. The SOFT effect only applies to certain voices — PIANO, for example.
TAP TEMPO
While the accompaniment is stopped, or during the SYNCHRO START mode before the
accompaniment is started, the footswitch can be used to set any desired tempo (within the
PSR-7000’s 32 to 280 beats per minute range) by simply tapping on the switch at the required tempo.
Tap 4 times for an accompaniment with a 4/4 time signature, 3 times for 3/4, and 5 times for
5/4.
If the accompaniment is started before the required number of taps has been entered, the
Tap Start setting will be ignored. The Tap Start setting will also be ignored if several seconds elapse before the required number of taps have been entered, if a different style is
selected, or if the accompaniment [START/STOP] button is pressed.
REGISTRATION +
Recall next highest (increment) registration. “1-1” is selected after “16-8”.
REGISTRATION –
Recall next lowest (decrement) registration. “16-8” is selected after “1-1”.
START/STOP
Same as panel [START/STOP] button.
ROTARY SPEAKER
Alternately selects the SLOW and FAST speeds of the rotary speaker when a DSP EFFECT
Rotary Speaker effect is selected (page 120).
HARMONY
Harmony occurs only while footswitch pressed.
INTRO/FILL to A
Same as panel [INTRO/FILL to A] button.
INTRO/FILL to B
Same as panel [INTRO/FILL to B] button.
ENDING/rit.
Same as panel [ENDING/rit.] button.
FADE IN/OUT
Same as panel [FADE IN/OUT] button.
F.CHORD 1/2
The footswitch alternately switches between the ABC FINGERED 1 and FINGERED 2
modes (page 24).
BASS HOLD
Holds the bass note so that “pedal bass” progressions can be produced using ABC.
PERCUSSION
Footswitch plays a percussion instrument selected by the ASSIGN LCD dials (the latter
appears when the PERCUSSION type is selected).
ACCOMP. BREAK
Pressing the footswitch produces a break in the accompaniment for as long as the pedal is
held. The accompaniment will start again from the top of the next odd-numbered measure
when the pedal is released.
PUNCH IN/OUT
Sets punch-in and punch-out points when song record mode is set to “Punch” (page 69).
113
F3: Controller
■ PANEL CONTROLLER ...........................................................................................................................................................
● SUSTAIN BUTTON
Determines to which of the PSR-7000 voices the
panel [SUSTAIN] button will apply.
Use the LEFT, R1, R2, LEAD, and ORGAN
LCD dials to turn [SUSTAIN] button control for the
corresponding voices ON or OFF as required. Accompaniment part assignments are the same as those
set for the footswitch.
● PITCH BEND WHEEL
Determines to which of the PSR-7000 voices the
PITCH BEND wheel will apply.
Use the LEFT, R1, R2, LEAD, and ORGAN
LCD dials to turn PITCH BEND wheel control for
the corresponding voices ON or OFF as required.
● MODULATION WHEEL
Determines to which of the PSR-7000 voices the
MODULATION wheel will apply.
Use the LEFT, R1, R2, LEAD, and ORGAN
LCD dials to turn MODULATION wheel control for
the corresponding parts ON or OFF as required.
114
F3: Controller
● INITIAL TOUCH
Sets the touch response OFF level and sensitivity
curve of the keyboard initial touch response, and
determines to which of the PSR-7000 voices touch
response will apply.
Use the OFF LEVEL LCD dial to set the level at
which touch response is turned off.
Use the SENSITIVITY LCD dials to select the
desired sensitivity curve.
Use the LEFT, R1, R2, LEAD, and ORGAN
LCD dials to turn initial touch response control for
the corresponding parts ON or OFF as required.
HARD 2
Requires the keys to be played very hard to produce maximum loudness.
HARD 1
Requires the keys to be played quite hard to produce maximum loudness.
NORMAL
Produces a fairly “standard” keyboard response.
SOFT 1
Not a sensitivity as the “SOFT 2” setting, but maximum loudness can still be easily produced with relatively light key pressure.
SOFT 2
Allows maximum loudness to be produced with very light key pressure.
● AFTER TOUCH
Sets the keyboard aftertouch sesitivity. Use the
SENSITIVITY LCD dials to select the desired
sensitivity. When the SOFT type is selected maximum variation can be produced with minimum
aftertouch presure.
Use the LEFT, R1, R2, LEAD, and ORGAN
LCD dials to turn aftertouch for the corresponding
parts ON or OFF as required.
115
F4: Style Revoice
This function allows you to “revoice” the currently selected style: i.e.
change the volume, voice, reverb depth, and chorus depth settings for
each accompaniment part. Style Revoice settings are retained in
memory as long as a good set of backup batteries is installed (see
page 2).
● VOLUME OFFSET
Use the RHY1, RHY2, BASS, CHD1, CHD2,
PAD, PHR1, and PHR2 LCD dials to set the volume offset for the corresponding accompaniment
parts. The volume offset range is from “–50” to
“+50”. These settings are relative to the volume
parameters available via the ACCOMPANIMENT
VOLUME MIXER display. The amount of volume
offset set for each part is shown by a graphic volume
bar to the right of the VOLUME parameter in the
upper section of the display. Press the RECALL
PRESET DATA LCD button to recall all preset
volume offset settings (all “0”).
● VOICE
Use the [ ] LCD button to switch between the
RHY1/RHY2/BASS/CHD1 and CHD2/PAD/PHR1/
PHR2 parameter groups. Use the GROUP LCD
dials for each part to select the voice group, and the
▲/▼ LCD dials to select the individual voice for
that part. Select “– –” to specify the preset voice for
any individual part. When the preset voice is selected a “P” appears in the corresponding box to the
right of the VOICE parameter in the upper section of
the display. A “V” appears when a non-preset voice
has been specified. Press the RECALL PRESET
DATA LCD button to recall all preset voices.
116
F4: Style Revoice
● REVERB DEPTH
Use the RHY1, RHY2, BASS, CHD1, CHD2,
PAD, PHR1, and PHR2 LCD dials to set the reverb
depth for the corresponding accompaniment parts.
The reverb depth range is from “0” (no reverb) to
“100” (maximum reverb), or “PRESET”. When the
preset reverb depth is selected a “P” appears in the
corresponding box to the right of the REVERB
parameter in the upper section of the display. The
reverb depth for each part which has a non-preset
setting is shown by a graphic depth bar to the right
of the REVERB parameter in the upper section of
the display. Press the RECALL PRESET DATA
LCD button to recall all preset reverb depth settings.
● CHORUS DEPTH
Use the RHY1, RHY2, BASS, CHD1, CHD2,
PAD, PHR1, and PHR2 LCD dials to set the chorus
depth for the corresponding accompaniment parts.
The chorus depth range is from “0” (no chorus) to
“100” (maximum chorus), or “PRESET”. When the
preset chorus depth is selected a “P” appears in the
corresponding box to the right of the CHORUS
parameter in the upper section of the display. The
chorus depth for each part which has a non-preset
setting is shown by a graphic depth bar to the right
of the CHORUS parameter in the upper section of
the display. Press the RECALL PRESET DATA
LCD button to recall all preset chorus depth settings.
117
F5: Reverb/Chorus/DSP Effect
The PSR-7000 has 16 reverb-based effects, a chorus effect, and 50
DSP (Digital Signal Processor) effects that can be selected via the
REVERB/CHORUS/DSP EFFECT function display. The selected
reverb, chorus, and DSP effect settings are applied to the sound when
the [REVERB], [CHORUS], and [DSP EFFECT] buttons are used (see
page38).
■
REVERB TYPE & DEPTH .....................................................................................................................................................
● REVERB TYPE
Selects the reverb type.
If the REVERB TYPE parameters are not showing on the lower section of the display, press the
TYPE LCD button. Use the LCD dials to select the
desired reverb effect. The name of the current reverb
type is shown to the right of the REVERB TYPE
parameter in the upper section of the display.
The Reverb Effects
1 Hall 1
9 Stage 1
2 Hall 2
10 Stage 2
3 Hall 3
11 Plate 1
4 Hall 4
12 Plate 2
5 Room 1
13 White Room
6 Room 2
14 Tunnel
7 Room 3
15 Canyon
8 Room 4
16 Basement
NOTES
• Try out all of the effects to get a feel for what they can do
to your sound.
• When a new style is selected, an appropriate reverb type
for that style is automatically selected.
118
F5: Reverb/Chorus/DSP Effect
● REVERB PARAMETER EDIT
When the REVERB TYPE parameters are selected as described above, the PARAMETER EDIT
LCD button will appear, pressing this button gives
you access to the individual reverb parameters for
the currently selected reverb type. Use the LCD dial
below the number corresponding to the parameter
you want to edit. Press the TYPE LCD button to
return to the REVERB TYPE parameters when done.
NOTES
• The default parameters will automatically be reselected
whenever a new reverb type is selected.
1. REVERB TIME
Range: 0.3 … 30 sec.
Sets the amount of time it takes for the reverb sound to decay by 60 dB (virtually to silence).
2. DIFFUSION
Range: 0 … 10
Adjusts the left-right “spread” of the reverb sound. The higher the value the greater the spread.
3. INITIAL DELAY
Range: 0 … 63
The length of the initial delay before the actual reverb sound begins (in milliseconds). The higher the value the
longer the initial delay.
4. HPF CUTOFF
Range: Thru, 22Hz … 8.0kHz
The cutoff frequency of the high-pass filter applied to the reverb sound. No filter is applied when set to “Thru”.
5. LPF CUTOFF
Range: 1.0kHz … 18kHz, Thru
The cutoff frequency of the low-pass filter applied to the reverb sound. No filter is applied when set to “Thru”.
● REVERB DEPTH
Independently sets the depth of the selected
reverb effect for the microphone, multi pads, accompaniment/song, left voice, right 1 voice, right 2
voice, lead voice, and organ flute voice.
If the REVERB DEPTH parameters are not showing
on the lower section of the display, press the DEPTH
LCD button. Use the MIC, M.PAD, ACMP/SONG,
LEFT, R1, R2, LEAD, and ORGAN LCD dials to set
the depth of the reverb effect as required for the
corresponding parts. The depth range is from “0”
(no reverb effect) to “100” (maximum reverb depth).
NOTES
• In addition to the graphic depth controls directly above the
LCD dials, reverb depth for each part is represented by a
vertical bar to the right of the REVERB DEPTH parameter
in the upper section of the display. The longer the bar, the
greater the reverb depth.
• Each part and voice has a preset depth value and range
over which the depth can be varied. Depth variations may
therefore not have the same audible effect with all voices.
119
F5: Reverb/Chorus/DSP Effect
■
CHORUS DEPTH ..........................................................................................................................................................................
Independently sets the depth of the chorus effect
for the microphone, multi pads, accompaniment,
left voice, right 1 voice, right 2 voice, and lead voice
Use the MIC, M.PAD, ACMP, LEFT, R1, R2,
and LEAD LCD dials to set the depth of the chorus
effect as required for the corresponding parts. Please
note that chorus does not apply to the ORGAN
voices. The depth range is from “0” (no chorus
effect) to “100” (maximum chorus depth).
NOTES
• In addition to the graphic depth controls directly above the
LCD dials, the chorus depth for each part is represented
by a vertical bar to the right of the CHORUS DEPTH
parameter in the upper section of the display. The longer
the bar, the greater the chorus depth.
• When a new style is selected, the preset chorus type and
depth value for that style is automatically recalled.
• Each part and voice has a preset depth value and range
over which the depth can be varied. Depth variations may
therefore not have the same audible effect with all voices.
■
DSP EFFECT TYPE & DEPTH .........................................................................................................................................
● DSP EFFECT TYPE
Selects the effect to be applied when the [DSP
EFFECT] button is turned on (page 39).
If the DSP EFFECT TYPE parameters are not
showing on the lower section of the display, press
the TYPE LCD button. Use the LCD dials to select
the desired type. The name of the current DSP effect
type is shown to the right of the DSP EFFECT
parameter in the upper section of the display. See
“THE DSP EFFECTS AND PARAMETERS”, below for a list of the effects and their parameters.
When an ORGAN FLUTE voice is being used,
the most suitable DSP type is selected automatically
and cannot be changed.
120
F5: Reverb/Chorus/DSP Effect
● DSP EFFECT PARAMETER EDIT
When the DSP EFFECT TYPE parameters are
selected as described above, the PARAMETER EDIT
LCD button will appear, pressing this button gives
you access to the individual DSP effect parameters
for the currently selected DSP type. Use the LCD
dial below the number corresponding to the parameter you want to edit. Press the TYPE LCD button to
return to the DSP EFFECT TYPE parameters when
done. See “THE DSP EFFECTS AND PARAMETERS”, below for a list of the effects and their
parameters.
The PRIORITY LCD dial lets you determine
whether the preset DSP EFFECT type and depth
settings for the LEAD or RIGHT 1 voice will be
selected whenever a voice is selected, or whether the
settings you make in this display affect all voices.
Select LEAD or RIGHT 1 to use the preset DSP
EFFECT settings for those voices, or MANUAL to
use your own settings for all voices.
● DSP EFFECT DEPTH
Independently sets the depth of the selected DSP
effect for the microphone, multi pads, accompaniment, left voice, right 1 voice, right 2 voice, and lead
voice
If the DSP EFFECT DEPTH parameters are not
showing on the lower section of the display, press
the DEPTH LCD button. Use the MIC, M.PAD,
ACMP, LEFT, R1, R2, and LEAD LCD dials to set
the depth of the DSP effect as required for the
corresponding parts. Please note that DSP Effect
does not apply to the ORGAN voices. The depth
range is from “0” (no DSP effect) to “100” (maximum DSP effect depth).
When an ORGAN FLUTE voice is being used,
the most suitable DSP type is selected automatically. Also the LEAD , RIGHT 1 and RIGHT 2
depth settings cannot be changed. The ORGAN
FLUTE depth setting can be changed via the ORGAN FLUTE LIST DISPLAY (see the ROTARY
SPEAKER DEPTH control on page 18).
NOTES
• The default parameters will automatically be reselected whenever a new DSP effect type is selected.
• These parameters cannot be changed when an ORGAN FLUTE
voice is being used.
• Some of the DSP types include parameters which cannot be
selected or changed. Such parts will appear inverted.
NOTES
• In addition to the graphic depth controls directly above the LCD
dials, DSP effect depth for each part is represented by a vertical
bar to the right of the DSP EFFECT DEPTH parameter in the
upper section of the display. The longer the bar, the greater the
DSP effect depth.
• See page 153 for a list including descriptions of the DSP effects
and parameters.
121
F6: Harmony/Registration
■
HARMONY ...........................................................................................................................................................................................
Selects the type of harmony to be applied when
the [HARMONY] button is turned on (page 37),
and the volume of the harmony sound.
Use the TYPE LCD dials to select the desired
harmony type. Use the VOLUME LCD dial to set the
volume of the harmony sound.
The Harmony Types
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Duet
Trio
4 Part
4 Part Jazz
Country
Octave
Tremolo Slow
Tremolo Fast
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Tremolo Duet
Strumming
BackingVocal
Add Trp.&Sax
Add Strings
Gtr. Picking
Banjo Player
In The Forest
NOTES
• The HARMONY feature cannot be turned on when the FULL
KEYBOARD ABC mode is engaged.
■
REGISTRATION .............................................................................................................................................................................
● NAME
You can enter descriptive names up to 16 characters in length for each registration setup via the
NAME function. The name entered is applied to the
currently selected registration setup.
If necessary, begin by select the desired registration bank and number. Use the < > LCD dial to
move the name cursor to the various character positions, then use the A~Z, a~z, or 0~9… LCD dial
to select the required character for each position.
The A~Z LCD dial selects capital letters, the a~z
LCD dial selects lower-case letters, and the 0~9…
LCD dial selects numbers and special characters.
NOTES
• It’s a good idea to give your registration setups names that
make them easily identifiable. If you’ve created a registration setup for a song named “MySong”, a good registration
name might be something like “MySong-Reg”.
● FREEZE GROUP SETTING
You can specify which settings are affected by
the FREEZE function via the FREEZE GROUP
SETTING function.
Use the GROUP SELECT LCD dials to select a
setting you want to freeze or “un-freeze”, then use
the MARK LCD dial to set or remove the check
mark for that setting. Repeat until all settings are
marked or un-marked as required.
122
F7: Utility
The F7: UTILITY function accesses utility functions that let you turn
memory backup on or off, set a number of display modes, and recall
the factory preset data.
■
MEMORY BACKUP .....................................................................................................................................................................
● MEMORY BACKUP
This function turns memory backup on or off.
Use the MEMORY BACK UP LCD dials to turn
memory backup ON or OFF.
NOTES
• The data backed up (retained in memory even when the
power is turned off) by the PSR-7000 are listed on page
140 in the MEMORY BACKUP column. When memory
backup is turned OFF, the initial factory settings are
automatically recalled whenever the power is turned on.
● DISPLAY - MIDI BANK SEL. & PROG.
CHANGE #, TIME
Determines whether the MIDI bank select and
program change numbers for each voice will be
shown along with the voice number and name on the
voice list display, and how long the list and message
displays remain on the LCD before they disappear.
Use the MIDI BANK SEL. & PROG. CHANGE
# LCD dials to turn the MIDI bank select and
program change numbers ON or OFF.
Use the TIME LIST and TIME MESSAGE
LCD dials to set the on-screen time of the list and
message displays, respectively. The higher the value
the longer the on-screen time.
■
RECALL PRESET DATA ........................................................................................................................................................
Recalls the specified initial factory settings.
Use any of the LCD dials to select the type of
factory preset data you want to recall, then press the
EXECUTE LCD button — the “Ready to recall
preset data” confirmation display will appear.
If you want to execute the recall preset data
operation press the YES LCD button (or press the
NO LCD button to cancel the operation). “Completed” will appear briefly when the job is finished.
123
F8: MIDI
MIDI, the Musical Instrument Digital Interface, is a world-standard communication interface that allows MIDI-compatible musical instruments and equipment to
share musical information and control one another. This makes it possible to create
“systems” of MIDI instruments and equipment that offer far greater versatility and
control than is available with isolated instruments. The PSR-7000 offers a range of
MIDI functions that allow it to be used in even sophisticated MIDI systems.
NOTES
• Always use a high-quality MIDI cable to connect MIDI OUT to MIDI IN terminals. Never use MIDI cables longer
than about 15 meters, since cables longer than this can pick up noise which can cause data errors.
SYSTEM
■
LOCAL CONTROL ......................................................................................................................................................................
The LOCAL CONTROL parameters determine
whether the corresponding PSR-7000 parts/voices
are controlled via the PSR-7000 keyboard or not.
When local control is on, the PSR-7000 keyboard
controls its internal tone generator, allowing the
internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. Local control can be turned off, however, so
that the PSR-7000 keyboard does not play the specified voices, but the appropriate MIDI information is
still transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector when
notes are played on the keyboard. At the same time,
the internal tone generator responds to MIDI information received via the MIDI IN connector. This
means that while an external sequencer or MIDI
computer, for example, plays the PSR-7000’s voices,
an external tone generator can be played from the
PSR-7000 keyboard.
Use the M.PAD, ACMP, LEFT, R1, R2, LEAD,
and ORGAN LCD dials to turn local control of the
corresponding parts/voices ON or OFF. A check
mark appears in the appropriate LOCAL CONTROL
box in the upper part of the display when local
control of the corresponding part/voice is turned on.
124
F8: MIDI
■
CLOCK & TRANSPOSE .........................................................................................................................................................
● CLOCK
Determines whether the PSR-7000 is controlled
by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal
received from an external device. INTERNAL is the
normal CLOCK setting when the PSR-7000 is being
used alone. If you are using the PSR-7000 with an
external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI
device, and you want the PSR-7000 to be synchronized to the external device, set this function to
EXTERNAL. In the latter case, the external device
must be connected to the PSR-7000 MIDI IN connector, and must be transmitting an appropriate
MIDI clock signal.
● TRANSPOSE
When the TRANSPOSE TRANSMIT parameter
is turned OFF, the PSR-7000 transpose settings are
not applied to transmitted MIDI data. When turned
ON, the PSR-7000 transpose settings apply to transmitted MIDI data in the same they do to notes played
on the PSR-7000 itself. When the TRANSPOSE
RECEIVE parameter is turned OFF note data received by the PSR-7000 is not transposed, and when
set to ON the received note data is transposed according to the current PSR-7000 transpose setting.
A check mark appears in the TRANSPOSE TRANSMIT or RECEIVE box when the corresponding
parameter is ON.
■
MESSAGE SWITCH ...................................................................................................................................................................
● START/STOP
The START/STOP TRANSMIT parameter turns
MIDI transmission of MIDI start and stop commands corresponding to starting or stopping the
PSR-7000 accompaniment or song play/record functions ON or OFF. The START/STOP RECEIVE
parameter turns MIDI reception of MIDI start and
stop commands generated by external equipment
ON or OFF. A check mark appears in the MESSAGE
SW START/STOP TRANSMIT or RECEIVE box
when the corresponding parameter is ON.
125
F8: MIDI
● EXCLUSIVE
The EXCLUSIVE TRANSMIT parameter turns
MIDI transmission of MIDI exclusive data (voice
and setup data) ON or OFF. The EXCLUSIVE
RECEIVE parameter turns MIDI reception of MIDI
exclusive data generated by external equipment ON
or OFF. A check mark appears in the MESSAGE
SW EXCLUSIVE TRANSMIT or RECEIVE box
when the corresponding parameter is ON.
TRANSMIT
This display page allows you to specify which PSR-7000 voices and parts will be transmitted via which MIDI
channels (there are 16 MIDI channels), and to specify which types of data will be transmitted for each channel.
● TRANSMIT MONITOR
The TRANS. MONITOR (transmit monitor) at
the top of the display indicates when data is being
transmitted on any of the 16 MIDI channels: The
dots corresponding to each channel (1 … 16) flash
briefly whenever any data is transmitted on the
channel(s).
● CHANNEL
Use either the ▲ and ▼ LCD buttons to the left
of the display, or the CH LCD dial to select the
channel to which you want to assign a part or change
a data switch setting. The channel numbers are show
in the leftmost column in the display.
● PART
The PART LCD dials select the voice or part
which will be transmitted via the currently selected
channel. Only one voice or part can be specified per
channel. Any of the parts listed below can be selected. If one part is assigned to multiple channels,
only the lowest-numbered channel will be used.
126
F8: MIDI
OFF
No data will be transmitted on the selected channel.
RIGHT 1
RIGHT 2
LEAD
LEFT
ORGAN FLUTE
Only data corresponding to the specified voice will be transmitted on the selected channel.
HARMONY 1
HARMONY 2
HARMONY 3
The Harmony feature (page 37) produces a maximum of three harmony notes. These settings
correspond to each of the harmony notes.
MULTI PAD 1
MULTI PAD 2
MULTI PAD 3
MULTI PAD 4
Multi pad phrases from the corresponding pad are transmitted via the selected channel. When
a pad is played in the PERCUSSION mode, however, the data is transmitted on the channel to
which MULTI PAD 1 is assigned.
CHORD pad data is transmitted as note data on the channels to which the appropriate accompaniment parts are assigned (RHY 1 … ACCOMP PHRASE2).
ACCOMP RHY 1
ACCOMP RHY 2
ACCOMP BASS
ACCOMP CHORD 1
ACCOMP CHORD 2
ACCOMP PAD
ACCOMP PHRASE1
ACCOMP PHRASE2
The specified accompaniment part is transmitted via the selected channel.
● NOTE, CONTROL CHANGE,
PROGRAM CHANGE, PITCH BEND, &
AFTER TOUCH SWITCH
These “switches” turn transmission of the specified data type on or off. Use the NOTE, CNTCNG,
PRGCNG, PITCHBND, and AFTERTCH LCD dials to
turn transmission of the corresponding data on or
off. A check mark appears in the appropriate box
when the corresponding switch is turned on.
NOTE
This switch turns transmission of the note data on or off. When off, no notes will be produced by an
external instrument or tone generator even when the voice or part assigned to the selected channel is
played. Note transmission can be turned off, for example, you only want the external device to respond
to program change numbers, changing the selected voice without actually playing it.
CNTCNG
Turns transmission of control change data on or off. Control change data includes modulation wheel,
foot controller, and any other controller data (except the pitch bend wheel, which has its own switch,
below).
PRGCNG
Turns transmission of program change data on or off. Program change data corresponds to voice or
“patch” numbers, and is used to select the corresponding voices on an external MIDI device.
PITCHBND
Turns transmission of pitch bend wheel data on or off.
AFTERTCH
Turns transmission of keyboard aftertouch data on or off.
127
F8: MIDI
RECEIVE
This display page allows you to specify the MIDI receive mode for each PSR-7000 MIDI channels, and to
specify which types of data will be received via each channel.
● RECEIVE MONITOR
The RECEIVE MONITOR at the top of the
display indicates when data is being received on any
of the 16 MIDI channels: The dots corresponding to
each channel (1 … 16) flash briefly whenever any
data is received on the channel(s).
● CHANNEL
Use either the ▲ and ▼ LCD buttons to the left
of the display, or the CH LCD dial to select the
channel to which you want to assign a mode or
change a data switch setting. The channel numbers
are show in the leftmost column in the display.
● MODE
The MODE LCD dials select the receive mode
for the currently selected channel. Any of the following modes can be selected:
OFF
No data will be received on the selected channel.
MULTI
This is the “Multi-Timbre” mode in which the corresponding channel of the internal tone generator is directly controlled by the received MIDI data.
MIDI BASS
When the AUTO MIDI BASS or MANUAL MIDI BASS ABC accompaniment mode is selected
this receive mode can be selected to allow reception of bass note data from an external MIDI
bass pedal unit or other device.
PANEL CONTROL
When this mode is selected the received MIDI data controls the PSR-7000 panel operations
rather than playing the internal tone generator. Which panel operations are controlled by
which types of MIDI data are specified in the PANEL CONTROL display page, described
below.
KEYBOARD
This is the “normal” receive mode in which MIDI note data received by the PSR-7000 (A-1 …
C7) plays the corresponding notes in the same way as if they were played on the keyboard.
Pitch bend, modulation, expression, and sustain control data is also accepted. Program
change and main volume data affects the RIGHT 1 voice only.
● NOTE, CONTROL CHANGE, PROGRAM CHANGE, PITCH
BEND, & AFTER TOUCH SWITCH
These “switches” turn reception of the specified data type on or off. Use
the NOTE, CNTCNG, PRGCNG, PITCHBND, and AFTERTCH LCD dials to turn
reception of the corresponding data on or off. A check mark appears in the
appropriate box when the corresponding switch is turned on.
128
F8: MIDI
NOTE
This switch turns reception of the note data on or off. When off, no notes will be produced by the
PSR-7000 even when note data is received on the selected channel.
CNTCNG
Turns reception of control change data on or off. Control change data includes modulation wheel, foot
controller, and any other controller data (except the pitch bend wheel, which has its own switch, below).
PRGCNG
Turns reception of program change data on or off. Program change data corresponds to voice or
“patch” numbers, and will select the corresponding voices on the PSR-7000 when the PRGCNG parameter is on.
PITCHBND
Turns reception of pitch bend wheel data on or off.
AFTERTCH
Turns reception of keyboard aftertouch data on or off.
PANEL CONTROL
The parameters in this display page assign specific PSR-7000 panel controls to notes. The assigned notes
then control the corresponding panel control operations when received via a MIDI channel which is set to the
PANEL CONTROL receive mode in the RECEIVE display, above.
● OCTAVE
Use either the s and t LCD buttons to the left
of the display, or the OCT LCD dial to select the
octave in which you want to assign a note. The
selected octave appears between the s and t LCD
buttons to the left of the display. The “C” note in
octave “3” corresponds to C3 (middle C) on the
keyboard.
● NOTE
Use the NOTE LCD dial to select the note to
which you want to assign a panel control function.
● TYPE SELECT & SUB
Use the TYPE SELECT LCD dials to assign a
panel control function to the selected note. The
available panel control function types are listed
below along with the corresponding note-on (note
played) and note-off (note released) events for each
type. In some cases the SUB1 and SUB2 LCD dials
are also used for type selection, as listed below.
129
F8: MIDI
TYPE
*
Note-on event
Note-off event
1. OFF
None
None
2. SUSTAIN
SUSTAIN ON
SUSTAIN OFF
3. SOSTENUTO
SOSTENUTO ON
SOSTENUTO OFF
4. SOFT
SOFT ON
SOFT OFF
5. TAP TEMPO
TAP TEMPO ON
—
6. REGIST.+
REGISTRATION UP
—
7. REGIST.–
REGISTRATION DOWN
—
8. SYNCHRO START
[SYNCHRO START] ON
—
9. START/STOP
[START/STOP] ON
—
10. ROTARY SP
ROTARY SPEAKER
SLOW n FAST
11. HARMONY
HARMONY ON
HARMONY OFF
12. INTRO/FILLtoA
[INTRO/FILL to A] ON
[INTRO/FILL to A] RELEASED
13. INTRO/FILLtoB
[INTRO/FILL to B] ON
[INTRO/FILL to B] RELEASED
14. MAIN A
[MAIN A] ON
—
15. MAIN B
[MAIN B] ON
—
16. ENDING/rit.
[ENDING/rit.] ON
—
17. FADE IN/OUT
[FADE IN/OUT] ON
—
18. FINGERED1/2
Switch between
FINGERED 1 and 2
—
19. BASS HOLD
BASS HOLD ON
BASS HOLD OFF
20. PERCUSSION
PERCUSSION KEY ON
with velocity*
PERCUSSION KEY OFF.
21. ACCOMP. BREAK
ACCOMP. BREAK ON
ACCOMP. BREAK OFF
22. TEMPO +
TEMPO [+] ON
TEMPO [+] RELEASED
23. TEMPO –
TEMPO [–] ON
TEMPO [–] RELEASED
24. MULTI PAD
Specified MULTI PAD ON**
MULTI PAD RELEASED
25. CHORD
Enter specified chord***
Use SUB1 LCD dial to select PERCUSSION 1 or PERCUSSION 2. The PERCUSSION 1 and 2 voices are
the same as those assigned to the footswitches — SW1 and SW2 — via the FOOT CONTROLLER function
display (page 112).
** Use SUB1 LCD dial to select MULTI PAD 1 … MULTI PAD 8.
*** Use SUB1 LCD dial to select chord root, and SUB2 LCD dial to select chord type.
130
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Noise is heard when the power is
turned on or off.
Possible Cause/Solution
This is a normal result of the power surge that occurs when the unit is
turned on or off. No solution necessary.
The volume controls or foot volume are turned all the way down.
Set the volume controls and foot volume to a reasonable listening
level.
Are the desired parts turned on?
A pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack. Unplug the headphones.
No sound.
Is the FOOT SWITCH connected to the FOOT VOLUME connector?
The FADE OUT switch is on and has reached the end of its duration,
muting the sound. Press the FADE IN/OUT switch so that its indicator
goes out.
MIDI local control is turned OFF. Turn MIDI local control ON using F8
MIDI function.
The style list or voice list does not appear even when a style or voice group
button is pressed.
The [LIST HOLD] button is engaged (its LED is lit). Press the [LIST
HOLD] button so that its indicator goes out, then try selecting a style or
voice (page 11).
The style list, voice list or one touch
setting list does not automatically
disappear.
The [LIST HOLD] button is engaged (its LED is lit). Press the [LIST
HOLD] button so that its indicator goes out.
Pressing the SUSTAIN button on the
panel will not switch on the SUSTAIN
function.
The panel SUSTAIN button does not function when SUSTAIN is assigned
to the connected FOOT SWITCH. Disconnect the FOOT SWITCH or use
the FOOT SWITCH to control sustain.
The accompaniment does not start.
The MIDI CLOCK setting is set to EXTERNAL. Reset the MIDI CLOCK to
INTERNAL using F8 MIDI function.
Some notes do not sound or are prematurely cut off.
The maximum polyphony has been exceeded. You can play up to 64
notes at the same time—including auto-accompaniment, song memory,
multi pad notes etc.. Notes exceeding this limit will not sound. When using
ABC or HARMONY, be careful not to exceed the limit.
When a voice or style is changed, the
previously selected effect is changed or
the sound is prematurely cut off.
This is normal, each voice or style has its own suitable preset values.
There is a slight difference in sound
quality between notes played on the
keyboard.
Some voice’s have a looping sound.
This is normal and is a result of the PSR-7000’s sampling system.
Some noise or vibrato is noticeable in
higher pitches depending upon the voice.
Some voice’s will jump an octave in pitch
when playing up or down scales in the
upper or lower registers.
The ABC chord does not change even
when a different chord is played or the
chord is not recognized.
Some voice’s have a pitch limit which has been reached. This is normal.
Are you sure you’re playing on the left-hand section of the keyboard?
You are using single-finger type fingering in the fingered mode, or viceversa. Use the correct type of chord fingering for the selected ABC mode.
Is the ABC MODE set to MANUAL MIDI BASS?
The disk’s remaining memory value does
not coincide with the actual value.
The value is an approximate value.
When using a MIDI controller, effects do
not function as usual or not at all.
It will depend on the selected voice.
If any trouble other than what is listed
above occurs try the solution at the right.
Turn the power off and remove the AC cord from wall and then try to
change the backup batteries or take out the backup batteries and replace
them after approximately 1 minute.
131
Index
Controller ...................................... 112
A
Copy (custom accomp) .................. 81
Accomp volume .............................. 30
Accompaniment ............................. 23
Accompaniment director ........ 27 – 30
After touch .................................... 115
Copy (song track) ........................... 73
Cursor .................... 50, 59, 75, 85, 88
Custom accomp ............................. 75
Custom voice ................................. 84
F
Fade in / out ................................... 30
Fill ................................................. 29
Fingered 1/2 ................................... 24
First key .......................................... 70
Arabic ........................................... 108
Foot switch ............................... 6, 112
Arranger ......................................... 34
Foot volume ............................. 7, 112
Attack ................................. 86, 91, 92
Auto bass chord (ABC) .................. 23
Auto MIDI bass ......................... 25
Fingered 1/2 ............................. 24
Full keyboard ............................ 25
Manual MIDI bass .................... 25
Single finger ............................. 24
Auto mute ....................................... 30
Aux in ............................................... 7
Aux out ............................................. 6
Freeze (Registration) ............. 52, 122
D
Full edit ........................................... 88
Decay ................................. 86, 91, 92
Delete ................................. 62, 65, 77
Demonstration .................................. 8
G
Depth .................................... 119, 120
Group ....................................... 14, 26
Destination ............................. 82, 102
Digital equalizer .............................. 41
Direct setting ............................ 20, 31
Disk
DOC ......................................... 53
B
GM ............................................ 53
Bank (registration) .......................... 49
PianoSoft .................................. 53
Bank select (MIDI) ........................ 123
Supplied disk (custom voice,
song playback) ................... 53, 84
Bass ................................... 23, 25, 34
Batteries ........................................... 2
Beet .......................................... 27, 77
Brilliance ................................... 86, 92
Disk button ..................................... 96
Disk drive ........................... 53, 58, 96
Disk in use ........................................ 3
Drum kit .......................................... 15
C
Chain .............................................. 55
Full keyboard .................................. 25
Delay vibrato .................................. 93
Drum voice ..................................... 95
DSP effect .............................. 39, 120
Dual voice ...................................... 88
H
Hard disk ...................................... 104
Harmony ................................. 37, 122
Headphones ..................................... 6
Help ................................................ 11
I
Individual (Foot volume) ............... 112
Individual load (Disk function) ........ 97
Initial touch ................................... 115
Initial touch curve ........................... 90
Intro/fill ...................................... 27, 29
Inversion ......................................... 33
Chord ............................................. 34
Chord assist ................................... 32
Chord match ........................... 46, 111
Chord pad ...................................... 44
Chord root ...................................... 32
Chord step record .......................... 63
Chord type ...................................... 32
Chorus .................................... 39, 120
Clear ................................... 83, 87, 94
Compare .................................. 85, 88
E
Easy edit ........................................ 85
K
Keyboard percussion ..................... 15
Easy setting .................................... 14
Ending/rit ........................................ 29
L
Equalizer ........................................ 41
Language ....................................... 11
Event .............................................. 82
LCD button ............................. 5, 9, 10
Exit button ................................ 9, 107
LCD contrast control ...................... 11
Expression ............................... 7, 112
LCD dial ................................. 5, 9, 10
Lead ............................................... 13
Left hold ......................................... 39
Left orchestra ................................. 13
132
Index
List hold .......................................... 11
Part select ...................................... 14
Song play ....................................... 53
Listen .................................. 100 – 102
Part tune ....................................... 109
Song record .................................... 58
Load ............................................... 96
Pause (song) .................................. 54
Sostenuto ..................................... 113
Percussion ..................................... 47
Source .................................... 73, 102
Percussion pad .............................. 47
Split point ......................... 20, 31, 110
Phrase ............................................ 34
Start/stop .................................. 27, 29
Phrase pad ............................. 42, 111
Store ................................... 83, 87, 94
Pitch bend wheel .................... 40, 114
Style revoice ................................. 116
Power button .................................... 8
Sustain ................................... 37, 112
Preset ........................................... 123
Synchro start .................................. 27
M
Main A/B ......................................... 28
Main volume ................................... 15
Manual (song) ................................ 60
Manual MIDI bass .......................... 25
Master volume .................................. 8
Measure ......................................... 77
Memory ........................................ 123
Priority .......................................... 121
Program change ........................... 123
Punch in/out ................................... 69
Metronome ..................................... 60
Mic jack ............................................ 6
Tap tempo ............................ 113, 130
Tempo ............................................ 26
Mic volume ....................................... 6
Q
MIDI .............................................. 124
Quantize ................................... 72, 81
Time ............................................. 123
Mix (song) ...................................... 73
Mixer .............................................. 10
Modulation wheel ................... 40, 114
Multi pad ......................................... 42
Multi pad mode select .................... 42
Music stand ...................................... 7
T
Time signature ............................... 77
Touch response ..................... 38, 115
Track .................................. 60, 66, 68
R
Transpose ...................................... 21
Registration .................................... 49
Release .............................. 86, 91, 92
Repeat
Trigger ............................................ 70
Tune ............................................... 21
Type ............................................... 63
Chord pad ................................. 46
Demo .......................................... 9
N
Resonance ............................... 86, 92
U
Name ...................... 50, 59, 75, 85, 88
Reverb .................................... 38, 118
Undo ........................... 72 – 74, 81, 82
Rhythm ........................................... 34
Utility ............................................ 123
O
Octave .............................. 14, 22, 109
Right orchestra ............................... 13
Root ................................................ 63
Rotary speaker ..................... 113, 130
Off level ........................................ 115
Off set ........................................... 116
V
Voice .............................................. 14
One touch setting ........................... 35
S
Orchestra ....................................... 13
Scale ............................................ 108
Organ flute ..................................... 16
Section ..................................... 28, 75
W
Wave .............................................. 88
Sensitivity ..................................... 115
P
Pad ................................................. 34
Pan ......................................... 14, 109
Panel control ................................ 129
Single (Custom voice) .................... 88
Single finger ................................... 24
Single play (demo) ........................... 9
Soft pedal ..................................... 113
Song copy .................................... 102
Parameter ............................ 119, 121
Part................................................. 13
133
Voice List • Stimmenverzeichnis • Liste des voix
RIGHT
Display BankSelect Program
Change
Voice Name
No. MSB LSB
No.
PIANO
1
0 112
0
GrandPiano 1
2
0 112
1
BrightPiano1
3
0 112
5
CP 70
4
0 113
4
Funky E.P.
5
0 113
5
Hyper E.P.
6
0 112
4
E.Piano 1
7
0 112
6
Harpsichord1
8
0
0
7
Clavi.
9
0
0
0
GrandPiano 2
10
0
0
1
BrightPiano2
11
0
0
4
E.Piano 2
12
0
0
5
E.Piano 3 DX
13
0
0
2
MIDI Grand
14
0 114
4
Rock E.Piano
15
0
0
6
Harpsichord2
16
0 112
7
Clavi Wah
17
0
0
3
Honky-tonk
18
0 115
4
E.Piano 4
19
0 116
4
E.Piano 5
20
0 117
5
Ballad DX
21
0 118
5
E.P.DX 7000
22
0 114
5
Bell E.Piano
23
0 115
5
Dream E.P.
24
0
0
8
Celesta
ORGAN
1
0 115
17
ClickOrgan1
2
0 116
17
ClickOrgan2
3
0 117
16
Drawbar Org1
4
0
0
16
Perc.Organ
5
0 112
19
TheaterOrgan
6
0 118
16
Drawbar Org2
7
0
0
18
Rock Organ 1
8
0
0
19
Pipe Organ
9
0
0
17
Drawbar Org3
10
0 117
17
Elec.Organ 1
11
0 116
16
Elec.Organ 2
12
0 119
16
Mellow Organ
13
0 112
18
Rock Organ 2
14
0 115
16
Drawbar Org4
15
0 112
20
Street Organ
16
0
0
20
Reed Organ
STRINGS/CHOIR
1
0 113
48
Strings 1
2
0
0
51
Strings 2
3
0 112
48
Chamber
4
0 115
48
Violin Str.
5
0 112
40
Violin 1
6
0 112
52
Choir
7
0 113
54
Synth Choir
8
0 112
54
Xenon Pad
9
0
0
48
Strings 3
10
0
0
49
Soft Strings
11
0 114
48
Slow Strings
12
0
0
45
Pizzicato
13
0
0
40
Violin 2
14
0
0
41
Viola
15
0
0
42
Cello
16
0
0
52
Choir Aah
17
0
0
44
Tremolo Str.
18
0
0
50
Syn.Strings
134
Display BankSelect Program
Change
Voice Name
No. MSB LSB
No.
19
0
0
53
Choir Ooh
20
0
0
54
Synth Voice
21
0
0
110
Fiddle
22
0
0
55
OrchestraHit
23
0
0
46
Harp
24
0 112
46
Synth Harp
SAX/WOODWIND
1
0 112
64
SopranoSax 1
2
0 112
65
Alto Sax 1
3
0 112
66
Tenor Sax 1
4
0
0
67
Baritone Sax
5
0 113
73
Flute 1
6
0
0
75
Pan Flute
7
0 112
68
Oboe 1
8
0
0
71
Clarinet
9
0
0
64
SopranoSax 2
10
0 113
65
Alto Sax 2
11
0 113
66
Tenor Sax 2
12
0 114
66
Growl Sax
13
0 114
65
Chorus Sax
14
0 115
65
Octave Sax
15
0 116
65
Sax+Clarinet
16
0 115
66
Sax+Trombone
17
0
0
65
Alto Sax 3
18
0
0
66
Tenor Sax 3
19
0
0
68
Oboe 2
20
0
0
69
English Horn
21
0 112
73
Flute 2
22
0
0
72
Piccolo
23
0
0
74
Recorder
24
0
0
70
Bassoon
25
0
0
73
Flute 3
26
0
0
77
Shakuhachi
27
0
0
82
Calliope
28
0
0
78
Whistle
29
0
0
79
Ocarina
30
0
0
76
Blown Bottle
TRUMPET/BRASS
1
0 113
56
Trumpet 1
2
0 112
56
Mellow Trp.
3
0 112
59
MuteTrumpet1
4
0 115
56
FlugelHorn 1
5
0
0
57
Trombone 1
6
0
0
61
Brass 1
7
0
0
62
SynthBrass 1
8
0 114
63
Wah Brass
9
0 112
57
Tromb. Sect.
10
0 112
61
Brass+Sax
11
0 113
61
Brass+Trmpet
12
0 114
61
Brass+Tromb.
13
0 115
61
Brass 2
14
0 117
61
Brass 3
15
0 113
63
SynthBrass 2
16
0 112
63
Jump Brass
17
0 118
61
Sfz.Brass
18
0 119
61
Big Brass 1
19
0 116
61
Big Brass 2
20
0
0
63
SynthBrass 3
21
0 115
63
Sweep Brass
22
0 113
62
Techno Brass
23
0
0
60
French Horn
Display BankSelect Program
Change
Voice Name
No. MSB LSB
No.
24
0
0
56
Trumpet 2
25
0
0
59
MuteTrumpet2
26
0 114
56
FlugelHorn 2
27
0 113
57
Trombone 2
GUITAR/BASS
1
0
0
24
NylonGuitar1
2
0
0
25
Steel Guitar
3
0
0
26
Jazz Guitar
4
0
0
28
Muted Guitar
5
0 114
27
Solid Guitar
6
0 115
27
CleanGuitar1
7
0 113
29
RockGuitar 1
8
0 112
27
Pedal Steel
9
0 112
24
NylonGuitar2
10
0 112
25
12String Gtr
11
0 113
27
Hawaiian Gtr
12
0 116
27
FullAcoustic
13
0
0
27
CleanGuitar2
14
0
0
29
OverdriveGtr
15
0 114
29
Fuzz Guitar
16
0
0
30
DistortionGt
17
0 112
29
RockGuitar 2
18
0
0
32
AcousticBass
19
0
0
35
FretlessBass
20
0
0
33
FingeredBass
21
0
0
34
Picked Bass
22
0
0
43
Contrabass
23
0 112
38
TechnoBass 1
24
0 112
39
TechnoBass 2
25
0
0
36
Slap Bass 1
26
0
0
37
Slap Bass 2
27
0 112
36
Slap Bass 3
28
0
0
38
Synth Bass 1
29
0
0
39
Synth Bass 2
30
0 113
38
Wow Bass 1
31
0 113
39
Wow Bass 2
32
0 114
39
Reso. Bass
33
0
0
31
GtrHarmonics
34
0
0
58
Tuba
ACCORDION/WORLD
1
0 117
21
Accordion 1
2
0
0
21
Musette 1
3
0 112
21
Trad. Acc. 1
4
0 112
23
Tango Acc. 1
5
0 117
27
Hackbrett
6
0 112
107
Zither
7
0
0
105
Banjo
8
0
0
22
Harmonica
9
0 113
21
Accordion 2
10
0 121
21
Musette 2
11
0 114
21
Gerda’s Acc.
12
0 115
21
Squeeze Box
13
0
0
23
Bandoneon 1
14
0 113
23
SmallAccord.
15
0 118
21
Bandoneon 2
16
0 114
23
Tango Acc. 2
17
0 120
21
Accordion 3
18
0 119
21
Bandoneon 3
19
0 115
23
Bavarian Acc
20
0 122
21
Trad. Acc. 2
21
0
0
109
Bagpipe
Voice List • Stimmenverzeichnis • Liste des voix
LEFT
Display BankSelect Program
Change
Voice Name
No. MSB LSB
No.
22
0
0
108
Kalimba
23
0
0
111
Shanai
24
0
0
106
Shamisen
25
0
0
107
Koto
26
0
0
104
Sitar
27
0
0
15
Dulcimer
SYNTH/PAD
1
0 112
81
Analog Lead
2
0 112
80
Sub Aqua
3
0 113
81
Power Lead
4
0 118
81
Pulse Lead
5
0 115
81
Waspy Synth
6
0 116
81
Wire Lead
7
0
0
80
Square Lead
8
0
0
81
Saw. Lead
9
0 112
62
Reso.Synth
10
0 114
81
Phase IV
11
0 112
82
70’s Lead
12
0 117
81
Dynamic Lead
13
0 112
91
Fantasia
14
0
0
99
Atmosphere
15
0
0
88
New Age Pad
16
0 112
90
Darkmoon
17
0 114
90
Analog Pad
18
0 114
54
Angels
19
0 113
90
DX Pad
20
0
0
89
Warm Pad
21
0
0
91
Choir Pad
22
0
0
102
Echo Pad
23
0
0
90
PolysynthPad
24
0
0
87
Bass & Lead
25
0
0
85
Voice Lead
26
0
0
83
Chiff Lead
27
0
0
84
Charang Lead
28
0
0
86
Fifth Lead
29
0
0
92
Bowed Pad
30
0
0
93
Metallic Pad
31
0
0
94
Halo Pad
32
0
0
95
Polar Pad
SOUND EFFECT
1
0 112
101
Wave 2001
2
0 112
95
Tranform
3
0
0
96
Rain
4
0
0
97
Soundtrack
5
0
0
100
Brightness
6
0
0
101
Goblins
7
0
0
98
Crystal
8
0
0
103
Sci-Fi
9
0
0
120
GtrFretNoise
10
0
0
121
Breath Noise
11
0
0
122
Seashore
12
0
0
123
Bird Tweet
13
0
0
124
Telephone
14
0
0
125
Helicopter
15
0
0
126
Applause
16
0
0
127
Gunshot
Display BankSelect Program
Change
Voice Name
No. MSB LSB
No.
PERCUSSIVE
1
0
0
9
Glockenspiel
2
0
0
10
Music Box
3
0 112
11
Vibraphone 1
4
0
0
12
Marimba
5
0
0
13
Xylophone
6
0
0
14
TubularBells
7
0
0
112
Tinkle Bell
8
0
0
113
Agogo
9
0
0
11
Vibraphone 2
10
0
0
114
Steel Drums
11
0
0
115
Woodblock
12
0
0
47
Timpani
13
0
0
116
Taiko Drum
14
0
0
117
Melodic Tom
15
0
0
118
Synth Drum
16
0
0
119
Rev.Cymbal
DRUM KIT
1
127
0
0
Standard Kit
2
127
0
8
Room Kit
3
127
0
16
Rock Kit
4
127
0
24
Electric Kit
5
127
0
25
Analog Kit
6
127
0
32
Jazz Kit
7
127
0
40
Brush Kit
8
127
0
48
Classic Kit
Display BankSelect Program
Change
Voice Name
No. MSB LSB
No.
PIANO/ORGAN
1
0 112
0
GrandPiano
2
0 112
1
BrightPiano
3
0 112
5
CP 70
4
0 113
4
Funky E.P.
5
0
0
4
E.Piano 1
6
0 112
21
Trad. Acc. 1
7
0 112
6
Harpsichord1
8
0 112
18
Rock Organ 1
9
0
0
7
Clavi.
10
0
0
2
MIDI Grand
11
0 113
5
Hyper E.P.
12
0 114
4
Rock E.Piano
13
0
0
6
Harpsichord2
14
0 112
7
Clavi Wah
15
0
0
3
Honky-tonk
16
0 115
4
E.Piano 4
17
0 116
4
E.Piano 5
18
0 117
5
Ballad DX
19
0 118
5
E.P.DX 7000
20
0 114
5
Bell E.Piano
21
0 115
5
Dream E.P.
22
0
0
8
Celesta
23
0 115
17
ClickOrgan1
24
0 116
17
ClickOrgan2
25
0 117
16
Drawbar Org1
26
0
0
16
Perc.Organ
27
0 112
19
TheaterOrgan
28
0
0
18
Rock Organ 2
29
0
0
19
Pipe Organ
30
0
0
17
Drawbar Org2
31
0 117
17
Elec.Organ 1
32
0 116
16
Elec.Organ 2
33
0 119
16
Mellow Organ
34
0 115
16
Drawbar Org3
35
0 112
20
Street Organ
36
0 120
16
Drawbar Org4
37
0 118
17
Drawbar Org5
38
0 118
16
Drawbar Org6
39
0 117
21
Accordion 1
40
0
0
21
Musette 1
41
0 117
27
Hackbrett
42
0 112
107
Zither
43
0 112
23
Tango Acc. 1
44
0
0
22
Harmonica
45
0 113
21
Accordion 2
46
0 121
21
Musette 2
47
0 114
21
Gerda’s Acc.
48
0 115
21
Squeeze Box
49
0
0
23
Bandoneon 1
50
0 113
23
SmallAccord.
51
0 118
21
Bandoneon 2
52
0 114
23
Tango Acc. 2
53
0 120
21
Accordion 3
54
0 119
21
Bandoneon 3
55
0 115
23
Bavarian Acc
56
0 122
21
Trad. Acc. 2
135
Voice List • Stimmenverzeichnis • Liste des voix
Display BankSelect Program
Change
Voice Name
No. MSB LSB
No.
STRINGS/CHOIR
1
0 113
48
Strings 1
2
0
0
51
Strings 2
3
0 112
48
Chamber
4
0 115
48
Violin Str.
5
0 112
40
Violin 1
6
0 112
52
Choir
7
0 113
54
Synth Choir
8
0 112
54
Xenon Pad
9
0
0
48
Strings 3
10
0
0
49
Soft Strings
11
0 114
48
Slow Strings
12
0
0
45
Pizzicato
13
0
0
40
Violin 2
14
0
0
41
Viola
15
0
0
42
Cello
16
0
0
52
Choir Aah
17
0
0
44
Tremolo Str.
18
0
0
50
Syn.Strings
19
0
0
53
Choir Ooh
20
0
0
54
Synth Voice
21
0
0
110
Fiddle
22
0
0
55
OrchestraHit
23
0
0
46
Harp
24
0 112
46
Synth Harp
BRASS/WOODWIND
1
0 112
64
SopranoSax 1
2
0 112
65
Alto Sax 1
3
0 112
66
Tenor Sax 1
4
0
0
67
Baritone Sax
5
0 113
73
Flute 1
6
0
0
75
Pan Flute
7
0 112
68
Oboe
8
0
0
71
Clarinet
9
0
0
64
SopranoSax 2
10
0 113
65
Alto Sax 2
11
0 113
66
Tenor Sax 2
12
0 114
66
Growl Sax
13
0 114
65
Chorus Sax
14
0 115
65
Octave Sax
15
0 116
65
Sax+Clarinet
16
0 115
66
Sax+Trombone
17
0
0
65
Alto Sax 3
18
0
0
66
Tenor Sax 3
19
0
0
69
English Horn
20
0 112
73
Flute 2
21
0
0
72
Piccolo
22
0
0
70
Bassoon
23
0
0
82
Calliope
24
0
0
76
Blown Bottle
25
0 113
56
Trumpet
26
0 112
56
Mellow Trp.
27
0 112
59
MuteTrumpet
28
0 115
56
FlugelHorn 1
29
0 113
57
Trombone
30
0
0
61
Brass 1
31
0
0
62
SynthBrass 1
136
Display BankSelect Program
Change
Voice Name
No. MSB LSB
No.
32
0 114
63
Wah Brass
33
0 112
57
Tromb. Sect.
34
0 112
61
Brass+Sax
35
0 113
61
Brass+Trmpet
36
0 114
61
Brass+Tromb.
37
0 115
61
Brass 2
38
0 117
61
Brass 3
39
0 113
63
SynthBrass 2
40
0 112
63
Jump Brass
41
0 118
61
Sfz.Brass
42
0 119
61
Big Brass 1
43
0 116
61
Big Brass 2
44
0
0
63
SynthBrass 3
45
0 113
62
Techno Brass
46
0
0
60
French Horn
47
0 114
56
FlugelHorn 2
SYNTH/PAD
1
0 112
91
Fantasia
2
0
0
99
Atmosphere
3
0
0
88
New Age Pad
4
0 112
90
Darkmoon
5
0 114
90
Analog Pad
6
0 114
54
Angels
7
0 113
90
DX Pad
8
0
0
89
Warm Pad
9
0
0
91
Choir Pad
10
0
0
102
Echo Pad
11
0
0
90
PolysynthPad
12
0 112
101
Wave 2001
13
0 112
95
Tranform
14
0
0
101
Goblins
15
0
0
103
Sci-Fi
16
0
0
95
Polar Pad
17
0 112
81
Analog Lead
18
0 112
80
Sub Aqua
19
0 113
81
Power Lead
20
0 118
81
Pulse Lead
21
0 115
81
Waspy Synth
22
0 116
81
Wire Lead
23
0
0
80
Square Lead
24
0
0
81
Saw. Lead
25
0 112
62
Reso.Synth
26
0 114
81
Phase IV
27
0 112
82
70’s Lead
28
0 117
81
Dynamic Lead
29
0 115
63
Sweep Synth
30
0
0
87
Bass & Lead
31
0
0
85
Voice Lead
32
0
0
86
Fifth Lead
33
0
0
96
Rain
34
0
0
97
Soundtrack
35
0
0
100
Brightness
36
0
0
83
Chiff Lead
37
0
0
92
Bowed Pad
38
0
0
93
Metallic Pad
39
0
0
94
Halo Pad
40
0
0
98
Crystal
Display BankSelect Program
Change
Voice Name
No. MSB LSB
No.
GUITAR/PERCUSSIVE
1
0
0
24
NylonGuitar1
2
0
0
25
Steel Guitar
3
0
0
26
Jazz Guitar
4
0
0
28
Muted Guitar
5
0 114
27
Solid Guitar
6
0 115
27
CleanGuitar1
7
0
0
29
OverdriveGtr
8
0 112
27
Pedal Steel
9
0 112
24
NylonGuitar2
10
0 112
25
12String Gtr
11
0 113
27
Hawaiian Gtr
12
0
0
27
CleanGuitar2
13
0 112
29
RockGuitar
14
0
0
30
DistortionGt
15
0
0
32
AcousticBass
16
0
0
35
FretlessBass
17
0
0
33
FingeredBass
18
0
0
34
Picked Bass
19
0
0
36
Slap Bass 1
20
0
0
37
Slap Bass 2
21
0 112
36
Slap Bass 3
22
0
0
38
Synth Bass 1
23
0
0
39
Synth Bass 2
24
0 114
39
Reso. Bass
25
0 112
38
TechnoBass 1
26
0 112
39
TechnoBass 2
27
0 113
38
Wow Bass 1
28
0 113
39
Wow Bass 2
29
0
0
43
Contrabass
30
0
0
58
Tuba
31
0 112
11
Vibraphone 1
32
0
0
12
Marimba
33
0
0
13
Xylophone
34
0
0
14
TubularBells
35
0
0
9
Glockenspiel
36
0
0
10
Music Box
37
0
0
112
Tinkle Bell
38
0
0
105
Banjo
Voice List • Stimmenverzeichnis • Liste des voix
LEAD
Display BankSelect Program
Change
Voice Name
No. MSB LSB
No.
TRUMPET/BRASS
1
0 127
56
Solo Trumpet
2
0 126
56
Mellow Trp.
3
0 127
59
Mute Trumpet
4
0 125
56
FlugelHorn 1
5
0 127
57
Trombone
6
0 126
57
SoftTrombone
7
0 122
61
Tight Brass
8
0 125
62
Brass Lead
9
0 124
56
Soft Trumpet
10
0 123
56
FlugelHorn 2
11
0 127
60
French Horn
12
0 121
61
Sfz.Brass
13
0 126
61
Brass+Sax
14
0 125
61
Brass+Tromb.
15
0 124
61
Big Brass 1
16
0 123
61
Big Brass 2
17
0 127
62
SynthBrass 1
18
0 126
62
SynthBrass 2
19
0 126
63
Wah Brass
20
0 124
62
Techno Brass
21
0 125
63
Jump Brass
22
0 123
62
Quack Brass
23
0 127
63
Analog Brass
SAX/WOODWIND
1
0 127
64
Soprano Sax
2
0 127
65
Alto Sax
3
0 127
66
Tenor Sax
4
0 127
67
Baritone Sax
5
0 127
71
Clarinet
6
0 127
22
Harmonica
7
0 127
73
Flute 1
8
0 127
75
Pan Flute
9
0 126
65
Sax+Clarinet
10
0 125
66
Sax+Trombone
11
0 126
66
Chorus Sax
12
0 124
66
Growl Sax
13
0 127
68
Oboe
14
0 127
69
English Horn
15
0 127
70
Bassoon
16
0 127
72
Piccolo
17
0 127
82
Calliope
18
0 126
73
Flute 2
19
0 127
78
Whistle
20
0 127
76
Blown Bottle
21
0 127
77
Shakuhachi
Display BankSelect Program
Change
Voice Name
No. MSB LSB
No.
STRINGS/CHOIR
1
0 127
40
Violin
2
0 127
42
Cello
3
0 125
48
Violin Str.
4
0 127
48
Strings
5
0 127
52
Choir Aah 1
6
0 125
52
Choir Aah 2
7
0 127
53
Choir Ooh
8
0 126
52
Big Choir
9
0 127
99
Atmosphere
10
0 127
88
New Age
11
0 127
103
Sci-Fi
12
0 125
54
Bell Voice
13
0 127
44
Tremolo Str.
14
0 127
49
Chamber
15
0 123
54
Xenon Lead
16
0 124
54
Angel
17
0 126
40
Soft Violin
18
0 127
41
Viola
19
0 127
110
Fiddle
20
0 126
48
Slow Strings
21
0 126
54
Synth Choir
22
0 127
54
Synth Voice
23
0 127
50
Synth String
24
0 127
55
OrchestraHit
GUITAR/BASS
1
0 127
24
Concert Gtr
2
0 127
25
Folk Guitar
3
0 126
25
12String Gtr
4
0 127
26
Jazz Guitar
5
0 124
27
Hawaiian Gtr
6
0 127
27
Clean Guitar
7
0 126
29
RockGuitar 1
8
0 127
28
Echo Muted
9
0 125
27
Wah Guitar
10
0 125
26
FullAcoustic
11
0 126
26
OctaveGuitar
12
0 126
27
Tremolo Gtr
13
0 127
30
DistortionGt
14
0 126
30
Fuzz Guitar
15
0 127
29
OverdriveGtr
16
0 125
29
RockGuitar 2
17
0 127
32
Double Bass
18
0 127
35
FretlessBass
19
0 127
36
Slap Bass 1
20
0 127
37
Slap Bass 2
21
0 126
24
Nylon Guitar
22
0 123
27
BrightGuitar
23
0 125
25
Gut Guitar
24
0 127
31
GtrHarmonics
25
0 127
39
Reso. Bass
26
0 126
38
Wow Bass 1
27
0 125
39
Wow Bass 2
28
0 125
38
Wow Bass 3
29
0 127
38
TechnoBass 1
30
0 126
39
TechnoBass 2
31
0 124
38
Jungle Bass
Display BankSelect Program
Change
Voice Name
No. MSB LSB
No.
SYNTH/PERCUSSIVE
1
0 125
81
Analog Lead
2
0 126
80
Sub Aqua
3
0 127
81
Saw. Lead 1
4
0 126
81
Reso. Saw.
5
0 125
82
70’s Lead
6
0 127
90
Dark Moon
7
0 127
80
Mini Lead 1
8
0 124
81
Big Lead
9
0 127
101
Wave 2001
10
0 123
81
Blowing Lead
11
0 126
82
Dragon Flute
12
0 122
81
Rain Hold
13
0 127
98
Quack Bell
14
0 124
63
Reso. Brass
15
0 125
80
Mini Lead 2
16
0 121
81
Saw. Lead 2
17
0 120
82
Phase IV
18
0 121
82
Wire Lead
19
0 122
82
Dynamic Lead
20
0 123
82
Pulse Lead
21
0 127
87
Bass & Lead
22
0 124
82
Seq.Anlog
23
0 127
9
Glockenspiel
24
0 127
12
Marimba
137
Percussion Kit List • Verzeichnis der Schlagzeug- und Percussion-Sets
Liste des kits de percussion
Bank MSB#
Program #
Note#
Note
13
C#0
14
D0
15
D#0
16
E0
17
F0
18
F#0
19
G0
20
G#0
21
A0
22
A#0
23
B0
24
C1
25
C#1
26
D1
27
D#1
28
E1
29
F1
30
F#1
31
G1
32
G#1
33
A1
34
A#1
35
B1
36
C2
37
C#2
38
D2
39
D#2
40
E2
41
F2
42
F#2
43
G2
44
G#2
45
A2
46
A#2
47
B2
48
C3
49
C#3
50
D3
51
D#3
52
E3
53
F3
54
F#3
55
G3
56
G#3
57
A3
58
A#3
59
B3
60
C4
61
C#4
62
D4
63
D#4
64
E4
65
F4
66
F#4
67
G4
68
G#4
69
A4
70
A#4
71
B4
72
C5
73
C#5
74
D5
75
D#5
76
E5
77
F5
78
F#5
79
G5
80
G#5
81
A5
82
A#5
83
B5
84
C6
127
1
Standard Kit
SurdoMut
SurdoOpn
Hi Q
WhipSlap
ScraPush
ScraPull
FingSnap
Click
MetroClk
MetroBel
SeqClckL
SeqClckH
BrushTap
BrshSwlL
BrshSlap
BrshSwlH
SnareRol
Castanet
Snare L
Sticks
Kick L
Open Rim
Kick M
Kick H
SideStck
Snare M
HandClap
Snare H
F Tom L
C.Hi-Hat
F Tom H
P.Hi-Hat
Low Tom
O.Hi-Hat
MidTom L
MidTom H
CrashCy1
High Tom
RideCym1
ChineCym
Ride Cup
Tambourn
SplashCy
Cowbell
CrashCy2
Vibraslp
RideCym2
Bongo H
Bongo L
CongaMut
CongaOpn
Conga L
TimbaleH
TimbaleL
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
SambaWhH
SambaWhL
GuiroSht
GuiroLng
Claves
WdBlockH
WdBlockL
CuicaMut
CuicaOpn
TrianglM
TrianglO
Shaker
JinglBel
BellTree
127
9
Room Kit
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
KickRoom
<——
<——
<——
<——
RoomTom1
<——
RoomTom2
<——
RoomTom3
<——
RoomTom4
RoomTom5
<——
RoomTom6
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
127
17
Rock Kit
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
SDRock M
<——
Kick M
<——
Kick H 3
KickRock
<——
SD Rock
<——
SDRokRim
RockTom1
<——
RockTom2
<——
RockTom3
<——
RockTom4
RockTom5
<——
RockTom6
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
* “<——” indicates the content is the same as that of Standard Kit.
* “<——” zeigt an, daß der Inhalt identisch mit dem Standardset ist.
* “<——” indique que le contenu est le même que celui du kit standard.
* “<——” indica que el contenido es el mismo que el del juego estándar.
138
127
25
Electro Kit
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
RevCymbl
<——
Hi Q
Snare M
<——
Kick H 4
<——
KickRock
KickGate
<——
SDRock L
<——
SDRock H
E Tom 1
<——
E Tom 2
<——
E Tom 3
<——
E Tom 4
E Tom 5
<——
E Tom 6
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
ScraPush
ScraPull
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
127
26
Analog Kit
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
RevCymbl
<——
Hi Q
SDRock H
<——
Kick M
<——
KickAnaL
KickAnaH
A.SdeStk
AnaSD L
<——
AnSD H
AnaTom 1
AnaC.HH1
AnaTom 2
AnaC.HH2
AnaTom 3
Ana O.HH
AnaTom 4
AnaTom 5
AnaCymbl
AnaTom 6
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
AnaCwbel
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
AnaCongH
AnaCongM
AnaCongL
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
AnaMarcs
<——
<——
<——
<——
AnaClavs
<——
<——
ScraPush
ScraPull
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
127
33
Jazz Kit
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
KickJazz
<——
<——
<——
<——
JazzTom1
<——
JazzTom2
<——
JazzTom3
<——
JazzTom4
JazzTom5
<——
JazzTom6
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
127
41
Brush Kit
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
BrshSlpL
<——
<——
<——
<——
KickSoft
<——
BrshSlap
<——
BrushTap
BrshTom1
<——
BrshTom2
<——
BrshTom3
<——
BrshTom4
BrshTom5
<——
BrshTom6
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
127
49
Classic Kit
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
GranCasa
<——
<——
<——
<——
JazzTom1
<——
JazzTom2
<——
JazzTom3
<——
JazzTom4
JazzTom5
HndCymOL
JazzTom6
HndCymCL
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
HndCymOH
<——
HndCymCH
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Style List • Rhythmusverzeichnis • Liste des styles
Display No. Style Name
ROCK/ROCK’N’ROLL
1
Rock&Roll 1*
2
Twist
3
Hard Rock
4
Rock Shuffle
5
Slow Rock*
6
Org RkBallad*
7
LiteRkBallad*
8
Rock Pop
9
Rock&Roll 2*
10
BoogieWoogie
11
Speed Metal
12
Rock Ballad*
13
6/8 Heavy Rk
14
Upbeat Pop*
15
CowboyBoogie*
16
Jive*
POP/BEAT
1
16Beat Pop
2
8Beat Light*
3
Pop Shuffle
4
Up Pop Shfle*
5
Detroit Pop
6
Pop Rock*
7
Upbeat Pop*
8
Guitar Pop*
9
Pop Rhumba 1
10
Pop Rhumba 2
11
Light Pop*
12
Folk Rock*
13
Surf Shuffle
14
Disco Pop*
15
Dance Pop*
16
Party Pop 1*
BALLAD
1
8Beat Ballad
2
6/8 Ballad 1*
3
Epic Ballad
4
Slow Ballad
5
16Bt Ballad1*
6
16Bt Ballad2
7
16Bt Ballad3
8
Piano Ballad
9
8Beat Light*
10
6/8 Ballad 2
11
Slow Rock*
12
FusionBallad*
13
Rock Ballad*
14
Org RkBallad*
15
LiteRkBallad*
16
Cntry Ballad*
DANCE
1
Dance Pop*
2
Eurobeat
3
Dance Party
4
Pop Rap
5
Techno 1
6
Techno 2
7
Synth Boogie
8
Acid Jazz
Display No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Style Name
DISCO
Disco Party
Disco Soul*
Disco Pop*
Disco Fox
Party Pop 1*
Party Pop 2
70s Disco
Disco Tropic
RHYTHM&BLUES
R&B
Funk
Soul
6/8 Blues*
6/8 Gospel
Gospel Waltz*
Disco Soul*
16Bt Ballad1*
JAZZ/SWING
Swing*
Big Band
BigBndBallad
Jazz Ballad
Cool Jazz
Uptempo Jazz
Swing Waltz*
Dixieland
Ragtime
Charleston
Gypsy Jazz
Fusion
Fusion Shfle
FusionBallad*
Jazz Waltz*
6/8 Blues*
LATIN
Pop Samba
Samba 1
Salsa
Bossa Fast
Pop Bossa
Beguine*
Pop Reggae
Merengue
Samba 2*
Reggae 16
Reggae 12
Bossa Slow
Mambo
Son
Bolero Lento
Espagnole
Display No. Style Name
COUNTRY&WESTERN
1
CountryRock1
2
CountryRock2
3
Bluegrass
4
Cntry Ballad*
5
CowboyBoogie*
6
Two Step
7
CountryShfle
8
Cntry Waltz1*
9
Cntry Waltz2*
10
Folk Rock*
11
Light Pop*
12
Up Pop Shfle*
13
Guitar Pop*
14
Pop Rock*
15
6/8 Ballad 1*
16
Rock&Roll 1*
MARCH/WALTZ
1
March 1
2
6/8 March 1
3
Trad. Waltz1*
4
Polka 1
5
Tarantella
6
Musette
7
Showtune
8
Polka Pop
9
March 2
10
6/8 March 2
11
Trad. Waltz2
12
Polka 2
13
Cntry Waltz1*
14
Cntry Waltz2*
15
Vienn.Waltz*
16
EnglishWaltz*
17
Jazz Waltz*
18
Swing Waltz*
19
Gospel Waltz*
BALLROOM
1
Vienn.Waltz*
2
EnglishWaltz*
3
Slowfox
4
Foxtrot
5
Quickstep
6
TangoArgent
7
Cha Cha
8
Rhumba
9
Samba 2*
10
Conga
11
Pasodoble
12
Jive
13
Rock&Roll 2*
14
Swing*
15
Beguine*
16
Trad. Waltz1*
* The styles with an asterisk (*) alonside appear in more than one group. They can be selected
from within any group.
139
Setup Parameters • Setup-Parameter • Paramètres de réglage général
O : YES
X : NO
PANEL
ORGAN FLUTE VOICE
LEAD VOICE
RIGHT1 VOICE
RIGHT2 VOICE
LEFT VOICE
RIGHT ORCHESTRA
PART SELECT
ROTARY SP. ON/OFF
ROTARY SP. SLOW/FAST
ORGAN FLUTE ON/OFF
LEAD ON/OFF
RIGHT1 ON/OFF
RIGHT2 ON/OFF
LEFT ON/OFF
LEFT HOLD
HARMONY
SUSTAIN
TOUCH RESPONSE
REVERB
CHORUS
DSP EFFECT
REGISTRATION
NUMBER
BANK
FREEZE
STYLE
ACCOMP. DIRECTOR
FADE IN/OUT
INTRO A/FILL to A
INTRO B/FILL to B
MAIN A,MAIN B
ENDING/rit.
SYNCHRO START
ARRANGER
PHRASE
PAD
CHORD
BASS
RHYTHM
ABC
ONE TOUCH SETTING
MULTI PAD SELECT
TEMPO
LIST HOLD
SONG PLAY
SONG RECORD
CUSTOM VOICE EDIT
CUSTOM ACCOMP. REC
FUNCTION
DISK
MIXER
MAIN
ORGAN FLUTE
LEAD
RIGHT1
RIGHT2
LEFT
ACCOMP.
MULTI PAD
SONG
140
REGISTRATION
REGISTRATION
FREEZE
group name
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
DISK DATA
group
MEMORY
BACK UP
RECALL
group name
FACTORY
PRESET
O
O
O
O
O
X
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
—
O
O
O
O
O
X
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
—
—
—
—
—
—
Big Organ
Tenor Sax
GrandPiano 1
Strings 1
Strings 1
R1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
EFFECTS
EFFECTS
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
HARMONY
VOICE
VOICE
EFFECTS
EFFECTS
EFFECTS
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ON
FAST
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
X
X
X
O
—
—
—
ACCOMP.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SETUP
X
X
O
O
—
—
—
—
—
1
OFF
Eurobeat
X
X
X
O
X
X
—
—
—
ACCOMP.
—
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SETUP
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
OFF
OFF
OFF
MAIN A
OFF
OFF
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
ACCOMP.
ACCOMP.
ACCOMP.
ACCOMP.
ACCOMP.
ACCOMP.
—
MULTI PAD
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
X
SETUP
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
TEMPO
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SETUP
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
—
PHRASE/
CHORD
122
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
ACCOMP.
MULTI PAD
SONG
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
100
90
80
80
60
100
100
100
Setup Parameters • Setup-Parameter • Paramètres de réglage général
ACCOMPANIMENT
PHRASE1
PHRASE2
PAD
CHORD1
CHORD2
BASS
RHYTHM1
RHYTHM2
TRANSPOSE
TUNE
EQ.
TYPE
USER LOW GAIN
USER LOW-MID GAIN
USER MID GAIN
USER MID-HI GAIN
USER HI GAIN
O.T.S.
NUMBER for each style
TEMPO SET ON/OFF
LANGUAGE
F1
SCALE
SCALE
REGISTRATION
REGISTRATION
FREEZE
group name
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
DISK DATA
group
MEMORY
BACK UP
RECALL
group name
FACTORY
PRESET
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
ACCOMP.
ACCOMP.
ACCOMP.
ACCOMP.
ACCOMP.
ACCOMP.
ACCOMP.
ACCOMP.
TRANSPOSE
—
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
0
440.0Hz
O
O
O
O
O
O
EQUALIZER
EQUALIZER
EQUALIZER
EQUALIZER
EQUALIZER
EQUALIZER
O
O
O
O
O
O
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
STANDARD
2
0
0
0
4
X
X
X
—
—
—
X
X
X
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
O
O
O
X
X
X
1
ON
ENGLISH
O
SCALE
O
SETUP
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
SCALE
X
EQUAL TEMPERAMENT
0
0
0
0
-50
0
0
0
0
0
0
-50
FLAT
TUNE (NOTE:C)
TUNE (NOTE:Db)
TUNE (NOTE:D)
TUNE (NOTE:Eb)
TUNE (NOTE:E)
TUNE (NOTE:F)
TUNE (NOTE:F#)
TUNE (NOTE:G)
TUNE (NOTE:Ab)
TUNE (NOTE:A)
TUNE (NOTE:Bb)
TUNE (NOTE:B)
SCALE CURVE
VOICE PART
PART TUNE MODE
TUNE (ORGAN FLUTE)
TUNE (LEAD)
TUNE (RIGHT1)
TUNE (RIGHT2)
TUNE (LEFT)
OCTAVE (ORGAN FLUTE)
OCTAVE (LEAD)
OCTAVE (RIGHT1)
OCTAVE (RIGHT2)
OCTAVE (LEFT)
PAN (ORGAN FLUTE)
PAN (LEAD)
PAN (RIGHT1)
PAN (RIGHT2)
PAN (LEFT)
F2
SPLIT POINT (ABC)
SPLIT POINT (LEFT)
ABC MODE
AUTO MUTE
MANUAL MIDI BASS VOICE
M.PAD REPEAT
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
AUTO
0cent
+3cent
0cent
-3cent
0cent
0
0
0
0
0
CENTER
CENTER
CENTER
CENTER
CENTER
O
O
O
O
O
O
ACCOMP.
VOICE
ACCOMP.
ACCOMP.
ACCOMP.
MULTI PAD
O
O
X
X
X
X
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
M.PAD CHORD MATCH
O
MULTI PAD
X
SETUP
O
X
F#2/G2
F#2/G2
FINGERED 1
ON
AcousticBass
PHRASE: OFF,
CHORD: ON
M.PAD1/2:OFF,
M.PAD3/4:ON
141
Setup Parameters • Setup-Parameter • Paramètres de réglage général
F3
FOOT VOLUME TYPE
FOOT VOLUME ASSIGN
FOOT SW1 TYPE
SUSTAIN ASSIGN for
FOOT SW1/2,
SUSTAIN BUTTON
SOSTENUTO ASSIGN for
FOOT SW1/2
SOFT ASSIGN for
FOOT SW1/2
PERCUSSION for
FOOT SW1
FOOT SW2 TYPE
PERCUSSION for
FOOT SW2
PITCH BEND WHEEL
ASSIGN
MODULATION WHEEL
ASSIGN
INITIAL TOUCH SENS.
INITIAL TOUCH ASSIGN
INITIAL TOUCH OFF LEVEL
AFTER TOUCH SENS.
AFTER TOUCH PART
F5
REVERB DEPTH
(ORGAN FLUTE,
LEAD,R1,R2,LEFT)
REVERB DEPTH
(ACMP/SONG)
REVERB DEPTH (M.PAD)
REVERB DEPTH (MIC)
REVERB TYPE
REVERB PARAMETER 1~5
CHORUS DEPTH
(LEAD, R1, R2, LEFT,
ACMP, M.PAD)
CHORUS DEPTH (MIC)
EFFECT PRIORITY
EFFECT DEPTH
(LEAD, R2,LEFT,
ACMP,M.PAD)
EFFECT DEPTH (RIGHT1)
EFFECT DEPTH (MIC)
EFFECT TYPE
EFFECT PARAMETER 1~5
F6
HARMONY TYPE
HARMONY VOLUME
REGISTRATION NAME
REGISTRATION FREEZE
GROUP
F7
MEMORY BACK UP
DISPLAY- MIDI BANK SEL. &
PROG. CHANGE #
TIME OUT (LIST,MESSAGE)
142
REGISTRATION
REGISTRATION
FREEZE
group name
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
DISK DATA
group
MEMORY
BACK UP
RECALL
group name
FACTORY
PRESET
O
O
O
O
CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER
X
X
X
O
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
MASTER
ALL ON
SUSTAIN
ALL ON
O
CONTROLLER
X
SETUP
O
X
ALL ON
O
CONTROLLER
X
SETUP
O
X
ALL ON
O
CONTROLLER
X
SETUP
O
X
O
O
CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER
X
X
SETUP
SETUP
O
O
X
X
O
CONTROLLER
O
SETUP
O
X
01 STANDARD KIT/
37 CrashCy1
TAP TEMPO
01 STANDARD KIT/
24 Kick H
ALL ON
O
CONTROLLER
O
SETUP
O
X
ALL ON
O
O
O
O
O
CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER
O
O
O
O
O
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
NORMAL
ALL ON
70
NORMAL
LEAD: ON
ORGAN FL,R1,
R2,LEFT: OFF
O
VOICE
O
SETUP
O
X
ALL PARTS 50
O
ACCOMP.
O
SETUP
O
X
50
O
O
O
O
O
MULTI PAD
MIC
EFFECTS
EFFECTS
VOICE
O
X
X
X
O
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
50
50
HALL 1
TYPE default
ALL PARTS 50
O
O
O
MIC
EFFECTS
EFFECTS
X
O
O
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
O
O
O
X
X
X
0
RIGHT1
0
O
O
O
O
EFFECTS
EFFECTS
EFFECTS
EFFECTS
O
O
O
O
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
33
0
Stage 2
TYPE default
O
O
O
X
HARMONY
HARMONY
—
—
O
O
O
X
SETUP
SETUP
REGISTRATION
SETUP
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
2 Trio
50
Registration
ACCOMP,
TEMPO:ON,
OTHERS:OFF
X
X
—
—
X
X
—
SETUP
O*2
O
X
X
OFF
OFF
X
—
X
SETUP
O
X
3
Setup Parameters • Setup-Parameter • Paramètres de réglage général
REGISTRATION
REGISTRATION
FREEZE
group name
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
DISK DATA
group
MEMORY
BACK UP
RECALL
group name
FACTORY
PRESET
X
—
X
SETUP
O
X
ALL PARTS ON
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
X
X
SETUP
SETUP
O
O
X
X
INTERNAL
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
LEAD,ALL ON
RIGHT1,ALL ON
RIGHT2,ALL ON
LEFT,ALL ON
ORGAN FLUTE,
ALL ON
OFF,ALL OFF
MULTI,ALL ON
X
—
X
SETUP
O
X
*1
DATA
SONG
ORGAN FLUTE
CUSTOM STYLE
X
1TYPE
X
—
—
—
X
1TYPE
X
(DISK DIRECT)
ORGAN FLUTE
CUSTOM STYLE
X
O*2
O*2
—
ORGAN FLUTE
X
CUSTOM VOICE
X
—
X
CUSTOM VOICE
O*2
X
WAVE for CUSTOM VOICE
REGISTRATION
MULTI PAD
F4 STYLE REVOICE
X
—
X
X
—
—
—
X
X
X
X
CUSTOM VOICE
REGISTRATION
MULTI PAD
STYLE REVOICE
O*2
O*2
O*2
O*2
X
X
MULTI PAD
STYLE REVOICE
—
default data
default
(some of preset)
default
(some of preset)
NO DATA
default (1data)
default data
default (preset)
F8
LOCAL CONTROL
(ORGAN FLUTE, LEAD, R1,
R2, LEFT, ACMP, M.PAD)
CLOCK
TRANSPOSE TRANSMIT
TRANSPOSE RECEIVE
START/STOP TRANS.
START/STOP RECEIVE
EXCLUSIVE TRANS.
EXCLUSIVE RECEIVE
TRNS. CH1 PART,SWITCH
TRNS. CH2 PART,SWITCH
TRNS. CH3 PART,SWITCH
TRNS. CH4 PART,SWITCH
TRNS. CH5 PART,SWITCH
TRNS. CH6~16 PART,SWITCH
RECEIVE CH1~16
MODE, SWITCH
PANEL CONTROL
*1 MIDI PANEL CONTROL default
NOTE C-2 ~ B0, Db2 ~ G8 :OFF
NOTE C1 :START/STOP
Db1
Eb1 :ENDING/rit.
E1
F#1 :ROTARY SP
G1
A1 :CHD F7
Bb1
C2 :FADE IN/OUT
:INTRO/FILL A
:REGIST+
:HARMONY
:CHD G
D1
F1
Ab1
B1
:INTRO/FILL B
:REGIST:CHD C
:CHD G7
*2 This data is backed up irrespective of F7 BACK UP=ON /OFF.
143
Fingering Chart • Akkordliste • Tablature
Seventh*
Septakkord*
Septième*
D#
(Eb)
D #m
(Eb m)
D #7
(Eb7)
E
Em
E7
F
Fm
F7
F#
(Gb)
F #m
(Gb m)
F# 7
(Gb7)
G
Gm
G7
G#
(Ab)
G# m
(Ab m)
G# 7
(Ab7)
A
Am
A7
A#
(Bb)
A #m
(Bb m)
A #7
(Bb7)
B
Bm
B7
)
(
(
)
(
(
(
)
)
Dm 7
(
)
D #m 7
(Eb m 7)
(
(
)
)
Em 7
(
(
)
)
Fm 7
(
)
F #m 7
(Gb m 7)
(
(
)
)
Gm 7
(
)
G# m 7
(Ab m 7)
(
(
)
)
Am 7
144
(
)
(
(
)
A #m 7
(Bb m 7)
)
D7
Bm 7
)
Dm
(
D
C# m 7
(Db m 7)
)
C#7
(Db7)
(
C# m
(Db m)
)
C#
(Db)
Cm 7
(
C7
)
Cm
)
C
Minor seventh
Moll-Septakkord
Mineure septième
(
Minor*
Moll*
Mineur*
)
Major*
Dur*
Majeur*
• Noten in Klammern ( ) können ausgelassen werden.
• Mit einem Sternchenzeichen (*) versehene Akkorde können in
jeder Umkehrung gespielt werden (d.h. der Grundton muß nicht
die tiefste angeschlagene Note sein).
• Wenn Sie drei nebeneinanderliegende Tasten (weiße und
schwarze Tasten) anschlagen, wird die Akkordbegleitung unterdrückt, so daß lediglich der Rhythmus zu hören ist.
• Überlegen Sie sich bitte vor dem Spielen eines Stücks, welche
Akkorde gebraucht werden. Bei Akkorden, die mit einem “●”
gekennzeichnet sind, ist unter Umständen eine Verlagerung des
Splitpunkts vorteilhaft, um das Greifen dieser Akkorde zu
erleichtern.
(
• Notes in parentheses ( ) can be omitted.
• Chord types marked with an asterisk (*) can be played in any
inversion (i.e. the root does not have to be the lowest note in the
chord).
• If you play any three adjacent keys (including black keys), the
chord sound will be canceled and only the rhythm instruments will
continue playing (CHORD CANCEL function).
• Please determine which chords you are going to use before
playing a song. In the case of chords marked with a “●” it may be
necessary to shift the split to allow easy fingering.
Fingering Chart • Akkordliste • Tablature
• Les notes entre parenthèses ( ) peuvent être omises.
• Les accords marqués d’un astérisque (*) peuvent être joués dans
n’importe qu’elle inversion (il n’est pas nécessaire que la note
fondamentale de l’accord soit la note la plus basse).
• Si vous jouez trois touches adjacentes (y compris les touches
noires), le son de la partie accords sera annulé et seuls les instruments rythmiques continueront à jouer (fonction CHORD
CANCEL, annulation d’accord).
• Veuillez déterminer quels accords que vous allez utiliser avant de
commencer l’exécution d’un morceau. Dans le cas des accords
marqués par “●”, il peut s’avérer nécessaire de déplacer le point
de partage pour faciliter l’exécution.
Sixth
Dur-Akkord mit
hinzugefügter Sexte
Sixte
C# 6
(Db 6 )
Dm 7 (b5)
D6
D #m 7 (b5)
(Eb m 7 (b5))
D#6
(Eb 6 )
Em 7 (b5)
E6
Fm 7 (b5)
F6
F #m 7 (b5)
(Gb m 7 (b5) )
F#6
(Gb 6 )
Gm 7 (b5)
G6
G# m 7 (b5)
(Ab m 7 (b5) )
G# 6
(Ab 6 )
Am 7 (b5)
A6
A #m 7 (b5)
(Bb m 7 (b5) )
A #6
(Bb6 )
Bm 7 (b5)
B6
CM 7
C# m 6
(Db m 6)
C# M 7
(Db M 7)
Dm 6
DM 7
D #m 6
(Eb m 6)
D #M 7
(Eb M 7)
Em 6
EM 7
Fm 6
FM 7
F #m 6
(Gb m 6)
F #M 7
(Gb M 7)
Gm 6
GM 7
G# m 6
(Ab m 6)
G# M 7
(Ab M 7)
Am 6
AM 7
A #m 6
(Bb m 6)
A #M 7
(Bb M 7)
Bm 6
BM 7
)
C# m 7 (b5)
(Db m 7 (b5))
Cm 6
(
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
)
(
(
)
(
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
(
)
)
(
)
(
(
)
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
)
C6
Major seventh*
Dur-Akkord mit großer
Septime*
Majeure septième*
)
Cm 7 (b5)
Minor sixth
Moll-Akkord mit
hinzugefügter Sexte
Mineure sixte
(
Minor seventh flatted fifth
Moll-Septakkord mit
verminderter Quinte
Quinte diminuée sur
mineure septième
145
Fingering Chart • Akkordliste • Tablature
Suspended fourth
Vorgehaltene Quarte
Quarte sur sensible
Augmented
Übermäßig
Augmenté
Diminished*
Vermindert*
Diminué*
Seventh suspended fourth
Dur-Septakkord mit
vorgehaltener Quarte
Quarte sur septième sensible
Caug
Cdim
C7 sus 4
C# sus 4
(Db sus 4)
C# aug
(Db aug)
C# dim
(Db dim)
C# 7 sus 4
(Db 7 sus 4)
Dsus 4
Daug
Ddim
D7 sus 4
D #sus 4
(Eb sus 4)
D #aug
(Eb aug)
D #dim
(Eb dim)
D #7 sus 4
(Eb 7 sus 4)
Esus 4
Eaug
Edim
E7 sus 4
Fsus 4
Faug
Fdim
F 7 sus 4
F #sus 4
(Gb sus 4)
F #aug
(Gb aug)
F #dim
(Gb dim)
F #7 sus 4
(Gb7 sus 4 )
Gsus 4
Gaug
Gdim
G7 sus 4
G# sus 4
(Ab sus 4)
G# aug
(Ab aug)
G# dim
(Ab dim)
G#7 sus 4
(Ab7 sus 4)
Asus 4
Aaug
Adim
A 7 sus 4
A #sus 4
(Bb sus 4 )
A #aug
(Bb aug)
A #dim
(Bb dim)
A #7sus 4
(Bb7 sus4 )
Bsus 4
Baug
Bdim
B7 sus 4
146
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
Csus 4
Fingering Chart • Akkordliste • Tablature
Diminished seventh
Verminderter Septakkord
Septième diminuée
Seventh flatted fifth
Dur-Septakkord mit
verminderter Quinte
Quinte diminuée en
septième
Minor major seventh*
Moll-Akkord mit großer
Septime*
Septième majeure sur
mineur*
C 7(b5)
CmM 7
C# dim 7
(Db dim 7)
C #7 (b5)
(Db7(b5))
C# mM7
(Db mM 7 )
Ddim 7
D 7(b5)
DmM 7
D #dim 7
(Eb dim 7)
D # 7 (b5)
(Eb7 (b5))
D #mM 7
(Eb mM 7)
Edim 7
E 7 (b5)
EmM7
Fdim 7
F 7 (b5)
FmM7
F #dim 7
(Gb dim 7)
F # 7 (b5)
(Gb7(b5) )
F #mM7
(Gb mM7 )
Gdim 7
G 7 (b5)
GmM7
G# dim 7
(Ab dim 7 )
G# 7 (b5)
(Ab7(b5) )
G# mM 7
(Ab mM 7 )
Adim 7
A 7 (b5)
AmM 7
A #dim 7
(Bb dim 7)
A # 7 (b5)
(Bb7 (b5))
A #mM 7
(Bb mM 7 )
Bdim 7
B 7 (b5)
BmM7
C 7 aug
(
)
Cdim 7
Seventh augmented*
Übermäßiger DurSeptakkord*
Septième augmentée*
(
)
C# 7 aug
(Db 7 aug)
(
)
D 7 aug
(
)
D # 7 aug
(Eb 7 aug)
(
)
E 7 aug
(
)
F 7 aug
(
)
F # 7 aug
(Gb 7 aug)
(
)
G 7 aug
(
)
G# 7 aug
(Ab 7 aug)
(
)
A 7 aug
B 7 aug
(
)
(
)
A # 7 aug
(Bb 7 aug)
147
Fingering Chart • Akkordliste • Tablature
Minor seventh ninth*
Moll-Septakkord mit None*
Neuvième sur septième
mineure*
Fm (9)
Fm 7 (9)
F #m (9)
(Gb m (9))
F #m 7 (9)
(Gb m 7 (9))
Gm (9)
Gm 7 (9)
G# m (9)
(Ab m (9))
G# m 7 (9)
(Ab m 7 (9))
Am (9)
Am 7 (9)
A #m (9)
(Bb m (9))
A #m 7 (9)
(Bb m 7 (9))
Bm (9)
Bm 7 (9)
(
)
)
(
)
)
(
)
(
)
(
(
)
F #M 7 (#11)
(Gb M 7 (#11))
(
(
)
)
GM 7 (#11)
(
)
G# M 7 (#11)
(Ab M 7 (#11))
)
AM 7 (#11)
(
)
(
A #M 7 (#11)
(Bb M 7 (#11))
)
(
(
)
(
)
)
(
148
FM 7 (#11)
(
(
B 7 (9)
)
)
(
(
)
(
)
A 7 (9)
A # 7 (9)
(Bb 7 (9) )
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
G 7 (9)
G# 7 (9)
(Ab 7 (9) )
(
(
)
(
F 7 (9)
F # 7 (9)
(Gb7 (9) )
EM 7 (#11)
)
Em 7 (9)
BM 7 (#11)
)
Em (9)
)
E 7 (9)
D #M 7 (#11)
(Eb M 7 (#11) )
(
D #m 7 (9)
(Eb m 7 (9))
)
D #m (9)
(Eb m (9))
(
)
(
D # 7 (9)
(Eb 7 (9))
DM 7 (#11)
(
Dm 7 (9)
)
Dm (9)
)
D 7 (9)
C# M 7 (#11)
(Db M 7 (#11) )
(
C# m 7 (9)
(Db m 7 (9))
)
C# m (9)
(Db m (9))
(
)
(
C#7 (9)
(Db7 (9))
CM 7 (#11)
(
Cm 7 (9)
Major seventh sharp eleventh*
Dur-Akkord mit großer Septime
und übermäßiger Undezime*
Septième majeure onzième
dièse*
)
Cm (9)
)
C 7 (9)
Minor added ninth*
Moll-Septakkord mit
hinzugefügter None*
Neuvième sur mineure*
(
Seventh ninth*
Dur-Septakkord mit
None*
Neuvième sur septième*
Fingering Chart • Akkordliste • Tablature
EM 7 (9)
Fadd9
FM 7 (9)
F #add9
(Gb add 9)
F #M 7 (9)
(Gb M 7 (9))
Gadd9
GM 7 (9)
G# add 9
(Ab add 9)
G# M 7 (9)
(Ab M 7 (9))
Aadd 9
AM 7 (9)
A #add 9
(Bb add 9)
A #M 7 (9)
(Bb M 7 (9))
Badd9
BM 7 (9)
(
(
)
(
(
)
Eadd9
(
D #M 7 (9)
(Eb M 7 (9))
C# m 7 (11)
(Db m 7 (11) )
)
D #add 9
(Eb add9 )
)
DM 7 (9)
(
Dadd 9
C# 6 (9)
(Db 6 (9) )
)
C# M 7 (9)
(Db M 7 (9))
)
C# add9
(Db add 9 )
Minor seventh eleventh
Moll-Septakkord mit
Unidezime
Onzième sur septième
mineure
Cm 7 (11)
C 6 (9)
)
CM 7 (9)
)
Cadd 9
(
Added ninth*
Hinzugefügte None*
Neuvième ajoutée*
Six ninth
Dur-Akkord mit Sexte
und None
Neuvième sur sixte
majeure
(
Major seventh ninth*
Dur-Akkord mit großer
Septime und None*
Neuvième sur septième
majeure*
Dm 7 (11)
(
(
)
)
)
(
)
)
(
)
D #m 7 (11)
(Eb m 7 (11))
Em 7 (11)
(
)
)
(
(
(
)
)
(
(
)
F #m 7 (11)
(Gb m 7 (11) )
)
(
)
(
)
(
(
)
F # 6 (9)
(Gb 6 (9) )
)
Fm 7 (11)
F 6 (9)
(
(
)
E 6 (9)
)
(
(
)
D # 6 (9)
(Eb 6 (9) )
(
(
)
D 6 (9)
Gm 7 (11)
(
)
(
(
)
)
(
(
)
)
(
Bm 7 (11)
(
)
(
)
A #m 7 (11)
(Bb m 7 (11) )
(
)
(
(
)
)
)
(
)
(
)
Am 7 (11)
(
)
(
B 6 (9)
(
)
G# m 7 (11)
(Ab m 7 (11) )
A 6 (9)
A # 6 (9)
(Bb 6 (9) )
)
)
)
(
(
)
G# 6 (9)
(Ab 6 (9) )
(
(
)
G 6 (9)
149
Fingering Chart • Akkordliste • Tablature
)
)
(
)
(
F 7 (b9)
)
)
)
)
(
)
(
(
(
)
G# 7 (b9)
(Ab7(b9) )
A 7 (b9)
)
)
B 7 (b9)
(
(
)
(
(
)
A # 7 (b9)
(Bb7 (b9))
)
(
(
)
(
)
(
(
G 7 (b9)
)
)
B 7 (13)
)
(
(
(
)
F # 7 (b9)
(Gb7(b9) )
A 7 (13)
A # 7 (13)
(Bb 7 (13))
(
)
)
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
(
)
G# 7 (13)
(Ab 7 (13))
)
(
(
)
)
(
)
E 7 (b9)
G 7 (13)
(
)
(
B 7 (#11)
(
(
)
A # 7 (#11)
(Bb 7 (#11))
(
150
(
(
)
(
BmM7 (9)
F # 7 (13)
(Gb7 (13))
A 7 (#11)
AmM 7(9)
A #mM 7 (9)
(Bb mM 7 (9) )
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
(
)
G# 7 (#11)
(Ab 7 (#11))
D # 7 (b9)
(Eb7 (b9))
F 7 (13)
G 7 (#11)
GmM7(9)
G# mM 7 (9)
(Ab mM 7 (9) )
(
)
)
(
F # 7 (#11)
(Gb7 (#11))
D 7(b9)
E 7 (13)
F 7 (#11)
FmM7 (9)
F #mM7 (9)
(Gb mM7 (9) )
D # 7 (13)
(Eb 7 (13) )
E 7 (#11)
EmM7 (9)
C #7 (b9)
(Db7(b9))
D 7 (13)
)
)
(
)
D # 7 (#11)
(Eb 7 (#11) )
(
D #mM 7(9)
(Eb mM 7(9) )
C#7 (13)
(Db7 (13) )
D 7 (#11)
DmM 7(9)
C 7(b9)
C 7 (13)
)
)
(
)
C#7 (#11)
(Db7 (#11) )
(
C# mM7 (9)
(Db mM 7(9) )
Seventh flatted ninth*
Dur-Septakkord mit
verminderter None*
Neuvième diminuée en
septième*
)
C 7 (#11)
CmM 7 (9)
Seventh added thirteenth*
Dur-Septakkord mit
hinzugefügter Tredezime*
Treizième ajoutée sur septième*
(
Seventh sharp eleventh*
Dur-Septakkord mit
übermäßiger Unidezime*
Septième onzième dièse*
(
Minor major seventh ninth*
Moll-Akkord mit großer
Septime und None*
Neuvième sur septième
majeure sur mineur*
Fingering Chart • Akkordliste • Tablature
Seventh sharp ninth*
Dur-Septakkord mit
übermäßiger None*
Neuvième dièse sur
septième*
C 7(#9)
C#7 (b13)
(Db7 (b13) )
C #7 (#9)
(Db7(#9))
D 7 (b13)
D 7(#9)
D # 7 (b13)
(Eb 7 (b13) )
D # 7 (#9)
(Eb7 (#9))
E 7 (b13)
E 7 (#9)
F 7 (b13)
F 7 (#9)
F # 7 (b13)
(Gb7 (b13))
F # 7 (#9)
(Gb7(#9) )
G 7 (b13)
G 7 (#9)
G# 7 (b13)
(Ab 7 (b13))
G# 7 (#9)
(Ab7(#9) )
A 7 (b13)
A 7 (#9)
A # 7 (b13)
(Bb 7 (b13))
A # 7 (#9)
(Bb7 (#9))
B 7 (b13)
B 7 (#9)
One plus two plus five
Eines plus Zwei plus Fünf
Un + deux + cinq
C1+2+5
CM 7 aug
(
(
)
)
C 7 (b13)
Major seventh augmented*
Dur-Akkord mit großer
Septime und übermäßiger
Quinte*
Quinte sur septième
majeure augmentée*
C# 1+2+5
(Db 1+2+5)
(
(
)
C# M 7 aug
(Db M 7 aug)
)
Seventh added flatted thirteenth*
Dur-Septakkord mit
hinzugefügter verminderter
Tredezime*
Treizième diminuée ajoutée
sur septième*
(
)
D1+2+5
(
)
DM 7 aug
)
D #1+2+5
(Eb 1+2+5)
(
(
)
D #M 7 aug
(Eb M 7 aug)
(
)
E1+2+5
(
)
EM 7 aug
F1+2+5
(
F #1+2+5
(Gb 1+2+5)
)
)
F #M 7 aug
(Gb M 7 aug)
(
(
(
)
)
FM 7 aug
G1+2+5
(
(
)
)
GM 7 aug
)
G# 1+2+5
(Ab 1+2+5)
(
(
)
G# M 7 aug
(Ab M 7 aug)
(
)
A1+2+5
(
)
AM 7 aug
)
A #1+2+5
(Bb 1+2+5)
)
BM 7 aug
B1+2+5
(
(
)
(
(
)
A #M 7 aug
(Bb M 7 aug)
151
Fingering Chart • Akkordliste • Tablature
Major seventh flatted fifth*
Dur-Akkord mit großer
Septime und
verminderter Quinte*
Quinte diminuée sur
majeure septième*
152
Minor major seventh flatted fifth*
Moll-Akkord mit großer Septime
und verminderter Quinte*
Quinte diminuée sur septième
majeure sur mineur*
Flatted fifth*
Dur-Akkord mit
verminderter Quinte*
Quinte diminuée*
CM 7 (b5)
C(b5)
CmM 7 (b5)
C# M 7 (b5)
(Db M 7 (b5))
C #(b5)
(Db(b5) )
C# mM7 (b5)
(Db mM 7(b5))
DM 7 (b5)
D(b5)
DmM 7(b5)
D #M 7 (b5)
(Eb M 7 (b5))
D #(b5)
(Eb(b5))
D #mM 7(b5)
(Eb mM 7(b5))
EM 7 (b5)
E (b5)
EmM7 (b5)
FM 7 (b5)
F (b5)
FmM7 (b5)
F #M 7 (b5)
(Gb M 7 (b5) )
F #(b5)
(Gb(b5))
F #mM7 (b5)
(Gb mM7 (b5))
GM 7 (b5)
G (b5)
GmM7(b5)
G# M 7 (b5)
(Ab M 7 (b5) )
G# (b5)
(Ab(b5))
G# mM 7 (b5)
(Ab mM 7 (b5))
AM 7 (b5)
A(b5)
AmM 7(b5)
A #M 7 (b5)
(Bb M 7 (b5) )
A # (b5)
(Bb(b5))
A #mM 7 (b5)
(Bb mM 7 (b5))
BM 7 (b5)
B (b5)
BmM7 (b5)
The DSP Effects & Parameters • DSP-Effekte und -Parameter
Effets et paramètres DSP
1. Hall 1
2. Hall 2
3. Hall 3
4. Hall 4
7. Room 3
8. Room 4
9. Stage 1
10. Stage 2
5. Room 1
11. Plate 1
6. Room 2
12. Plate 2
These are all reverberation (“reverb” for short) effects. Reverb is the warm musical “ambience” you experience
when listening to music in a hall or other natural environment.
1. REVERB TIME
Range: 0.3 … 30 sec.
Sets the amount of time it takes for the reverb sound to decay by 60 dB (virtually to silence).
2. DIFFUSION
Range: 0 … 10
Adjusts the left-right “spread” of the reverb sound. The higher the value the greater the spread.
3. INITIAL DELAY
Range: 0 … 63
The length of the initial delay before the actual reverb sound begins (in milliseconds). The higher the value the longer the
initial delay.
4. HPF CUTOFF
Range: Thru, 22Hz … 8.0kHz
The cutoff frequency of the high-pass filter applied to the reverb sound. No filter is applied when set to “Thru”.
5. LPF CUTOFF
Range: 1.0kHz … 18kHz, Thru
The cutoff frequency of the low-pass filter applied to the reverb sound. No filter is applied when set to “Thru”.
13. EaryRef1
14. EaryRef2
15. GateRev.
16. RevrsGat
EaryRef (Early Reflections) effects are created using different groupings of “early reflections” — the first cluster of
reflections that occurs after the direct sound but before the dense reflections that are known as reverberation begin.
The GateRev (Gate Reverb) and RevrsGat (Reverse Gate) effects combine reverb with a selectable “gate”.
1. EARLY REF TYPE (EarlyRef1 & 2)
Range: S-H, L-H, RDM, RVS, PLT, SPR
The “S-H” and “L-H” settings select typical groupings of early reflections that would occur in a small or large hall, respectively. “RDM” (Random) produces an irregular series of reflections that could not occur naturally. “RVS” (Reverse) generates a series of reflections that increase in level — like the effect produced by playing a recorded reverberation sound
backwards. “PLT” (Plate) produces a typical grouping of reflections that would occur in a plate reverb unit, and “SPR
(Spring) simulates the early reflections of a spring type reverb unit.
1. GATE TYPE (Gaterev. & RevrsGat)
Range: TYPE A, TYPE B
2. ROOM SIZE
Range: 0.1 … 7.0
Sets the separation between reflections. Higher values produce greater separation between reflections, and therefore the
effect of a bigger room.
3. DIFFUSION
Range: 0 … 10
Adjusts the left-right “spread” of the early reflection or gated reverb sound. The higher the value the greater the spread.
4. INITIAL DELAY
Range: 0 … 63
Sets the delay time before the early reflection or gated reverb sound begins.
5. FEEDBACK LEVELRange: –63 … 0 … +63
Determines the amount of effect-sound feedback returned to the input of the effect stage. Higher negative or positive
values produce a more extended effect.
17. Chorus 1
18. Chorus 2
19. Chorus 3
20. Chorus 4
22. Flanger1
23. Flanger2
24. Flanger3
25. Flanger4
21. Chorus 5
The chorus effects combine delay and modulation to effectively thicken and add warmth to the sound.
Flanging is a fairly pronounced effect based primarily on delay time modulation. By adjusting the various parameters you should be able to create an extremely broad range of sounds, from gentle shimmering to wild sweeps.
1. LFO FREQUENCY Range: 0 … 127
Sets the speed of LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) modulation, and therefore the rate of effect variation.
2. LFO PM DEPTH
Range: 0 … 127
Sets the depth of phase modulation. Higher values produce deeper modulation and therefore a more pronounced effect.
153
The DSP Effects & Parameters • DSP-Effekte und -Parameter • Effets et paramètres DSP
3. FEEDBACK LEVELRange: –63 … 0 … +63
Determines the amount of effect-sound feedback returned to the input of the effect stage. Higher negative or positive
values produce a more pronounced effect.
4. DELAY OFFSET
Range: 0 … 63
Varies the flanger delay time (the flanger effect is basically produced by modulating the delay time of one signal in relation
to another). Shorter delay times produce the greatest effect in the high-frequency range, while longer delay times extend
the effect to the middle and lower frequencies.
26. Symphon.
Symphonic is a broad, sweeping effect that adds a sense of scale to the sound.
1. LFO FREQUENCY Range: 0 … 127
Sets the speed of LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) modulation, and therefore the rate of effect variation.
2. LFO DEPTH
Range: 0 … 127
Sets the depth of modulation. Higher values produce deeper modulation and therefore a more pronounced effect.
3. DELAY OFFSET
Range: 0 … 63
Varies the symphonic effect delay time (the Symphonic effect is basically produced by modulating the delay time of one
signal in relation to another). Shorter delay times produce the greatest effect in the high-frequency range, while longer
delay times extend the effect to the middle and lower frequencies.
27. Phaser
A traditional “phaser” effect, producing a gentle phase-shift sound that can be used to add extra animation to your
sound.
1. LFO FREQUENCY Range: 0 … 127
Sets the speed of LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) modulation, and therefore the rate of effect variation.
2. LFO DEPTH
Range: 0 … 127
Sets the depth of modulation. Higher values produce deeper modulation and therefore a more pronounced effect.
3. PHASE SHIFT
Range: 0 … 127
Sets the phase difference between the left and right channel phaser signals. The larger the value, the greater the “spread”
in the sound. A setting of “0” produces a centered effect.
4. FEEDBACK LEVEL Range: –63 … 0 … +63
Determines the amount of effect-sound feedback returned to the input of the effect stage. Higher negative or positive
values produce a more pronounced effect.
28. Rot.Sp.1
29. Rot.Sp.2
30. Rot.Sp.3
31. Rot.Sp.4
32. Rot.Sp.5
These effects simulate the swirling sound of the rotary speakers often used with electronic organs.
1. LFO FREQUENCY Range: 0 … 127
Sets the speed of LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) modulation, and therefore the rate of effect variation.
2. LFO DEPTH
Range: 0 … 127
Sets the depth of modulation. Higher values produce deeper modulation and therefore a more pronounced effect.
33. Tremolo1
34. Tremolo2
35. GtrTrem.
Although “tremolo” effects, these effects also include a pitch-modulation depth parameter that can be used to add a
touch of vibrato.
1. LFO FREQUENCY Range: 0 … 127
Sets the speed of LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) modulation, and therefore the rate of effect variation.
154
The DSP Effects & Parameters • DSP-Effekte und -Parameter • Effets et paramètres DSP
2. AM DEPTH
Range: 0 … 127
Sets the depth of amplitude modulation. Higher values produce deeper modulation and therefore a more pronounced
tremolo effect.
3. PM DEPTH
Range: 0 … 127
Sets the depth of pitch modulation. Higher values produce deeper modulation and therefore a more pronounced vibrato
effect.
36. Auto Pan
This is a sophisticated pan program that allows creation of “rotary” pan in addition to straightforward pan effects.
1. LFO DEPTH
Range: 0 … 127
Sets the overall depth of modulation. Higher values produce deeper modulation and therefore a more pronounced pan
sweep.
2. L/R DEPTH
Range: 0 … 127
Sets the “depth” of the pan sweep from left to right and right to left.
3. F/R DEPTH
Range: 0 … 127
This parameter sets the apparent depth of the sweep from front to rear.
4. PAN DIRECTION Range: L<>R, L>R, L<R, Lturn, Rturn, L/R
Determines the direction in which the sound sweeps across the stereo sound field.
37. Auto Wah
A fully automatic wah effect that can be set to produce a wide range of sounds.
1. LFO FREQUENCY Range: 0 … 127
Sets the speed of LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) modulation, and therefore the rate of effect variation.
2. LFO DEPTH
Range: 0 … 127
Sets the depth of modulation. Higher values produce deeper modulation and therefore a more pronounced effect.
3. CUTOFF FREQUENCY
Range: 0 … 127
Sets the basic frequency around which the wah filter sweep will occur.
4. RESONANCE
Range: 1 … 12
Creates a resonant peak at the frequency determined by the CUTOFF FREQUENCY parameter, above. The higher the
value the higher the peak, and the more the sound at that frequency is emphasized.
38. DelayLCR
39. DelayL,R
In the DelayLCR effect, independent delays are provided for the left and right channels, plus a center delay. The
DelayL,R variation provides independently programmable delays for the left and right channels.
1. L CH DELAY
2. R CH DELAY
3. C CH DELAY
Range: 0.1 … 715 ms
Set the delay time between the direct sound and the first repeat. Independent parameters are provided for the left (“L
CH”), center (“C CH”), and right (“R CH”) channels. Only the L CH DELAY and R CH DELAY time parameters are available for the DelayL,R effect.
4. FEEDBACK DELAY (DelayLCR)
3. FEEDBACK DELAY 1 & 4.FEEDBACK DELAY2 (DelayL,R)
Range: 0.1 … 715 ms
Sets the delay time between repeats. The higher the value the longer the delay. In the DelayL,R effect independent feedback delay parameters are provided for the left and right channels.
5. FEEDBACK LEVELRange: –63 … 0 … +63
Determines the amount of effect-sound feedback returned to the input of the delay stage. Higher values produce a greater
number of repeats.
155
The DSP Effects & Parameters • DSP-Effekte und -Parameter • Effets et paramètres DSP
40. Echo
Although similar to the DelayL,R effect, Echo features independent feedback level parameters for the left and right
channels, plus a “high damp” parameter that simulates the high-frequency damping characteristics of most natural
acoustic environments.
1. L CH DELAY
3. R CH DELAY
Range: 0.1 … 715 ms
Set the delay time between the direct sound and the first repeat. Independent parameters are provided for the left (“L
CH”) and right (“R CH”) channels.
2. L CH FB LEVEL
4. R CH FB LEVEL
Range: –63 … 0 … +63
Determine the amount of effect-sound feedback returned to the input of the corresponding delay stage channel: L CH FB
LEVEL for the left channel and R CH FB LEVEL for the right channel. Higher values produce a greater number of repeats.
5. HIGH DAMP
Range: 0.1 … 1
Produces a natural decay in the high-frequency components of subsequent repeats. The lower the value the faster and
more pronounced the drop-off in high-frequencies.
41. CrossDly
This is a “cross delay” effect in which the repeats from a sound in one channel are produced in the opposite channel.
1. LmR DELAY
2. RmL DELAY
Range: 0.1 … 355 ms
The LmR DELAY and RmL DELAY parameters independently set the delay times for repeats crossing from left to right,
and from right to left, respectively.
3. FEEDBACK LEVELRange: –63 … 0 … +63
Determines the amount of effect-sound feedback returned to the input of the delay stage. Higher values produce a greater
number of repeats.
4. INPUT SELECT
Range: L, R, L&R
Selects the first channel to be delayed (“L”, “R”), or both channels simultaneously (“L&R”).
5. HIGH DAMP
Range: 0.1 … 1
Produces a natural decay in the high-frequency components of subsequent repeats. The lower the value the faster and
more pronounced the drop-off in high-frequencies.
42. DistHARD
43. DistSOFT
Two distortion effects that can drastically alter you sound.
1. DRIVE
Range: 0 … 127
Sets the intensity of the distortion effect. Higher values produce more distortion.
2. AMP TYPE
Range: OFF, STACK, COMBO, TUBE
Simulates a variety of amplifier types via which the distortion sound might be reproduced.
OFF
Flat amp — the sound of a “direct feed” to a recording or sound reinforcement console.
STACK
The powerful, expansive sound of “stackable” speaker cabinets.
COMBO
A single 12" speaker unit in a compact enclosure.
TUBE
Simulates the warm, relatively “soft” distortion produced by vacuum tube amplifiers.
3. LPF CUTOFF
RANGE: 1.0kHz … 18kHz, Thru
The cutoff frequency of the low-pass filter applied to the distortion sound. No filter is applied when set to “Thru”.
4. OUTPUT LEVEL
Range: 0 … 127
Sets the output level of the distortion sound. Higher values produce higher level.
156
The DSP Effects & Parameters • DSP-Effekte und -Parameter • Effets et paramètres DSP
44. EQ DISCO
45. EQ TEL.
Both of these effects are based on a two-band equalizer with independent high and low frequency and gain parameters.
1. EQ LOW FREQUENCY
Range: 50Hz … 2.0kHz
Sets the boost/cut frequency of the low equalizer.
2. EQ LOW GAIN
Range: –12dB … 0dB … +12dB
Sets the amount of boost or cut applied to the low-band frequencies. A setting of “0” produces no boost or cut. Minus
values produce cut and plus values produce boost.
3. EQ HI FREQUENCY Range: 500Hz … 16kHz
Sets the boost/cut frequency of the high equalizer band.
4. EQ HI GAIN
Range: –12dB … 0dB … +12dB
Sets the amount of boost or cut applied to the high-band frequencies. A setting of “0” produces no boost or cut. Minus
values produce cut and plus values produce boost.
46. Karaoke1
47. Karaoke2
48. Karaoke3
The “Karaoke” effects are simple delay effects that simulate the type of “echo” used in most karaoke systems.
1. DELAY TIME
Range: 0 … 63
Sets the delay time between the direct sound and the first repeat.
2. FEEDBACK LEVELRange: –63 … 0 … +63
Determines the amount of effect-sound feedback returned to the input of the delay stage. Higher values produce a
greater number of repeats.
3. HPF CUTOFF
Range: Thru, 22Hz … 8.0kHz
The cutoff frequency of the high-pass filter applied to the delay sound. No filter is applied when set to “Thru”.
4. LPF CUTOFF
Range: 1.0kHz … 18kHz, Thru
The cutoff frequency of the low-pass filter applied to the delay sound. No filter is applied when set to “Thru”.
49. Distort.
50. OverDriv
Distortion and overdrive effects that can produce distortion ranging from subtle to sizzling.
1. DRIVE
Range: 0 … 127
Sets the intensity of the distortion or overdrive effect. Higher values produce more distortion.
2. EQ LOW FREQUENCY
Range: 50Hz … 2.0kHz
Sets the boost/cut frequency of the low equalizer.
3. EQ LOW GAIN
Range: –12dB … 0dB … +12dB
Sets the amount of boost or cut applied to the low-band frequencies. A setting of “0” produces no boost or cut. Minus
values produce cut and plus values produce boost.
4. LPF CUTOFF
RANGE: 1.0kHz … 18kHz, Thru
The cutoff frequency of the low-pass filter applied to the distortion sound. No filter is applied when set to “Thru”.
5. OUTPUT LEVEL
Range: 0 … 127
Sets the output level of the distortion sound. Higher values produce higher level.
157
The DSP Effects & Parameters • DSP-Effekte und -Parameter • Effets et paramètres DSP
51. Unison.
52. 5th Harmo
Both of these effects produce a pitch-changed note in addition to the note played. With the default settings “Unison”
produces a note one octave above the original note while “5th Harmony” produces a note one fifth above the original
note.
1. PITCH
Range: -12 … +12
Sets the pitch of the added note in semitone steps.
2. INITIAL DELAY
Range: 0 … 127
Sets the delay between the initial note and the pitch changed note. “0” results in no delay. The higher the value the
greater the delay.
3. FINE1
4. FINE2
Range: -50 … +50
These parameters fine tune the pitch of the pitch-changed note. Two FINE parameters are provided to allow “detuning”
effects.
5. FEEDBACK GAIN RANGE: -63 … +63
Sets the amount of feedback applied. Feedback allows a series of pitch-changed notes to be produced — the higher the
feedback value the greater the number of notes produced.
53. TouchWah
54. Wah+Dist
These are wah effects in which the depth of the wah is controlled by keyboard touch response.
1. SENSITIVITY
Range: 0 … 127
Sets the sensitivity of the effect to keyboard touch. The higher the value the greater the sensitivity.
2. CUTOFF FREQUENCY
Range: 0 … 127
Sets the cutoff frequency of the wah effect. The higher the value the higher the cutoff frequency.
3. RESONANCE
Range: 1 … 12
Sets the level of a resonant peak at the cutoff frequency. Higher values produce greater emphasis at the cutoff frequency.
55. Compressor 56. NoiseGat
The compressor can be used to smooth out level variations when playing voices such as guitar for a “tighter” sound.
The noise gate effectively minimizes hum and noise.
A compressor and noise gate effect with similar parameters.
1. ATTACK
Range: 1 ms … 40 ms
Sets the attack time of the compressor/noise gate. Higher values produce a longer attack time.
2. RELEASE
Range: 10 ms … 680 ms
Sets the release time of the compressor/noise gate. Higher values produce a longer release time.
3. THRESHOLD
Range: -48 dB … -6 dB
Sets the threshold level at which the compressor/noise gate begins to take effect.
4. RATIO (Compressor only) Range: 10 … 20
Sets the compression ratio of the compressor. Higher values produce greater compression..
5. OUTPUT LEVEL
Range: 0 … 127
Sets the output level of the effect sound. Higher values produce higher level.
158
MIDI Implementation Chart • Implementierungstabelle • Table d’implémentation
[PortaTone]
Model: PSR-7000
MIDI Implementation Chart
Function
Transmitted
Recognized
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
1~16 CH (*1)
1~16 CH (*1)
1~16 CH (*2)
1~16 CH (*2)
Mode
Default
Messages
Altered
3
X
*****************
3
X
X
: True voice
0~127
*****************
0~127 (*3)
0~127
Velocity
Note on
Note off
O 9nH, v=1~127
X 9nH, v=0
O 9nH, v=1~127
X
After
Touch
key’s
Ch’s
X
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X (*5)
X (*5)
X (*5)
X (*5)
X (*5)
O
O
O
X
X (*5)
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Program
Change : True #
O 0~127
*****************
O 0~127
0~127
System Exclusive
O
O
System
: Song Position
: Song Select
Common : Tune
X
X
X
X
X
X
System : Clock
Real Time : Commands
O
O
O
O
Aux
X
O
O
X
X
O (123 – 127)
O
X
Note
Number
Pitch Bender
Control Change
Date: 1995. 07. 18
Version: 1.0
0, 32
1
6, 38
7
10
11
64
66
67
71
72
73
74
84
91
93
94
96, 97
98, 99
100, 101
120
121
: Local ON/OFF
: All Notes Off
Messages : Active Sense
: Reset
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO
Remarks
Bank select MSB, LSB (*4)
Modulation
Data entry MSB, LSB
Volume
Pan
Expression
Sustain
Sostenuto
Soft pedal
Harmonic content
Release time
Attack time
Brightness
Portamento control
Reverb send level
Chorus send level
Variation effect send level
Data increment, decrement
NRPN LSB, MSB (*6)
RPN LSB, MSB (*7)
All sound off
Reset all controllers (*8)
(*9)
O: Yes
X: No
159
MIDI Implementation Chart • Implementierungstabelle • Table d’implémentation
*1 The RIGHT1, RIGHT2, LEAD, LEFT, ORGAN FLUTE, HARMONY,
MULTI PAD, and ACCOMPANIMENT parts can be independently
transmitted via the panel controls.
*2 The tone generator normally functions as a 16-channel multi-timbre
tone generator in response to MIDI input. MIDI messages therefore
do not normally affect the panel voices or other panel settings. The
MIDI messages listed below, however, do affect the panel voice,
style, multi pad, and song settings:
• MIDI master tuning, MIDI master volume, MASTER TRANSPOSE.
• Drum setup-related exclusive messages.
• System exclusive messages which change the reverb, chorus,
or DSP effect settings.
The KEYBOARD mode can be selected via panel control. Note on/
off messages received on KEYBOARD MODE channels are handled in the same way as note on/off data from the internal keyboard.
Only the following channel messages are recognized in this mode:
• Key on/key off.
• Control change: bank select (RIGHT1 only), modulation, main
volume, (RIGHT1 only), expression, sustain.
• Program change (RIGHT1 only).
• Pitch bend, all notes off.
*3 Limited to the range 21…108 on KEYBOARD MODE channels.
*4 BANK SELECT MSB
MSB 00H
MSB 00H
MSB 6FH
MSB 6FH
MSB 7FH
MSB 7FH
LSB 00H
LSB 70H~7FH
LSB 00H~11H
LSB 60H~7FH
LSB 00H
LSB 6FH
Preset GM tone generator.
Non-GM preset panel voices.
ORGAN FLUTE voices.
Custom voice orchestra voices.
Preset drum kit voices.
Custom voice drum kit voices.
Channel 10 is reserved for drum kit voices after a GM ON message is received.
No voice change occurs when only a bank change message is
received. The latest bank change message is applied when a
program change message is received.
*5 These Control Change messages are not transmitted by the PSR7000 panel operation, but may be transmitted by the accompaniment style playing.
*6 NRPN transmission/reception
The following parameters are supported.
NRPN
MSB LSB
01H 08H
Data entry
MSB LSB
mmH - -
01H
09H
mmH - -
01H
0AH
mmH - -
01H
20H
mmH - -
01H
21H
mmH - -
01H
63H
mmH - -
01H
64H
mmH - -
01H
66H
mmH - -
14H rrH
mmH - rr: drum instrument note number
15H rrH
mmH - rr: drum instrument note number
16H rrH
mmH - rr: drum instrument note number
17H rrH
mmH - rr: drum instrument note number
18H rrH
mmH - rr: drum instrument note number
19H rrH
mmH - rr: drum instrument note number
1AH rrH
mmH - rr: drum instrument note number
1CH rrH
mmH - rr: drum instrument note number
1DH rrH
mmH - rr: drum instrument note number
1EH rrH
mmH - rr: drum instrument note number
1FH rrH
mmH - rr: drum instrument note number
Parameter Name/Range
Vibrato Rate
mm : 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
Vibrato Depth
mm : 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
Vibrato Delay
mm : 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
Filter Cutoff Freq.
mm : 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
Filter Resonance
mm : 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
EG Attack Time
mm : 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
EG Decay Time
mm : 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
EG Release Time
mm: 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
Drum Filter Cutoff Freq.
mm: 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
Drum Filter Resonance
mm: 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
Drum EG Attack Rate
mm: 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
Drum EG Decay Rate
mm: 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
Drum Instrument Pitch Course
mm: 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
Drum Instrument Pitch Fine
mm: 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
Drum Instrument Level
mm: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
Drum Instrument Panpot
mm: 00H - 40H - 7FH (L - Center - R)
Drum Instrument Reverb Send Level
mm: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
Drum Instrument Chorus Send Level
mm: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
Drum Instrument DSP Send Level
mm : 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
Default
40H
40H
40H
40H
40H
40H
40H
40H
40H
40H
40H
40H
40H
40H
Depends on note
Depends on note
Depends on note
Depends on note
Depends on note
Data entry LSB is ignored.
If MSB data is 14H through 1FH, it is applied as available data
when the channel is set to the drum mode and when DRUM SET
UP 2 or 3 is selected. (default set is SET UP 2)
*7 RPN transmission/reception
The following parameters are supported.
RPN
MSB LSB
00H 00H
Data entry
MSB LSB
mmH - -
00H
01H
mmH - -
00H
02H
mmH - -
7FH 7FH
--
--
Parameter Name/Range Default
Pitch bend Sensitivity
mm: 00H - 02H - 0CH (0 - 2 - 12)
Fine Tuning
mm: 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
Course Tuning
mm: 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
RPN Null
Clears current RPN and NRPN number settings.
Data entry LSB is ignored.
*8 Pitch Bend, modulation, expression, sustain, sostenuto and
softpedal are returned to their default values.
Clears current RPN and NRPN number settings.
Resets portamento source note number.
160
02H
40H
40H
--
MIDI Implementation Chart • Implementierungstabelle • Table d’implémentation
*9 Exclusive
The following system exclusive messages are recognized.
<GM system ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H
All parameters except MIDI master Tuning and Dsp setting are
reset to their default values.
Remote Channel setting is cancelled.
This message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so
sufficient time should be allowed before the next message is
sent.
<MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H
Allows the volume of all channels to be changed simultaneously.
“mm” is used as the MIDI Master Volume value (“ll” is ignored).
The default value for “mm” is 7FH.
<MIDI Master Tuning>
F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H
“mm, ll” is used as the MIDI Master Tuning value.
The tuning value is represented as follows:
T=M-128 (28<
=M<
=228), T=-100 (M<28), T=100 (M>228)
T is the actual tuning value in cents.
M is decimal value represented by 1-byte using bits 0..3 of
“mm” as the MSB and bits 0..3 of “ll” as the LSB.
The default values of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H respectively.
n and cc are also recognized.
This value is not reset by a GM System ON or Reset All Controllers message.
This value affects not only MIDI reception part but the entire
system of the PSR-7000.
<XG Native Parameter Change>
F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, aaH, bbH, ccH, ddH........F7H
n: device number (n=0~FH)
aa,bb,cc: address High, Mid, Low
dd: data
A corresponding data size is transmitted when the data size is
2 or 4 parameters.
Note: This product is compatible with the XG format parameters listed in the chart, but not with the many other
parameters included in the XG full format.
<XG System On> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 00H, 00H, 7E, 00H, F7H
n: device number (n=0~FH)
<XG Native Bulk Dump>
F0H, 43H, 0nH, 4CH, bl, bh, aaH, bbH, ccH, <Data>, cs, F7H
n: device number (n=0~FH)
bl, bh: byte count (only data portion shown)
aa,bb,cc: address High, Mid, Low (Refer to the accompanying chart)
cs: Checksum (Byte Count + Start Address + Data +
Checksum=0 : calculated binary in first 7 bit)
The data series listed under “Total Size” in the chart is one
bulk dump. Only the header address is used as the bulk
data address.
Since an error can occur when a large amount of bulk data
is received, data series longer than 512 bytes are divided
into groups of less than 512 bytes each, and transmitted
with a time interval of greater than 120 ms between each
group.
Note: This product is compatible with the XG format parameters listed in the chart, but not with the many other parameters included in the XG full format.
<XG System Data Bulk Dump>
See Tables 1-1, 1-2.
<Multi Effect1 Data Bulk Dump>
See Tables 1-1, 1-3.
<Drums Setup Data Bulk Dump>
See Tables 1-1, 1-5.
<Parameter Request>
F0H, 43H, 3nH, 4CH, aaH, bbH, ccH, F7H
n: device number (n=0~FH)
aa,bb,cc: address High, Mid, Low
Requests are accepted for parameters which can be changed.
Only the header address is interpreted as the parameter request address for a Data Size of 2 or 4 parameters.
<Dump Request>
F0H, 43H, 2nH, 4CH, aaH, bbH, ccH, F7H
n: device number (n=0~FH)
aa,bb,cc: address High, Mid, Low
The data series listed under “Total Size” in the chart is one bulk
dump. Only the header address is interpreted as the bulk data
address.
All parameters other than MIDI master tuning are reset to their
default values.
This message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so
sufficient time should be allowed before the next message is
sent.
<XG System Data Parameter Change>
See Tables 1-1, 1-2.
<Multi Effect1 Data Parameter Change>
See Tables 1-1, 1-3.
<Multi Part Data Parameter Change>
See Tables 1-1, 1-4.
<Drums Setup Data Parameter Change>
See Tables 1-1, 1-5.
161
MIDI Data Format • MIDI-Datenformat • Format des donées MIDI
<Table 1-1>
Parameter Base Address
Model ID = 4C
Parameter Change
Address
(H) (M) (L)
XG
00
00
00
SYSTEM
00
00 7D
00
00
7E
00
00
7F
EFFECT 1
02
01
00
DRUM
30
18
00
31
18
00
Description
System
Drum Setup Reset
XG System On
Reset All Parameters
Effect1(Reverb,Chorus,Variation )
Drum Setup 1
Drum Setup 2
Address
3n 0B 00
3n 0C 00
:
3n 5B 00
m
Parameter
note number 13
note number 14
:
note number 91
<Table 1-2>
MIDI Parameter Change table ( SYSTEM )
Address
(H)
00 00 00
01
02
03
04
06
7D
7E
7F
TOTAL SIZE
Size
(H)
4
Data
(H)
0000 - 07FF
1
1
00 - 7F
28 - 58
n
00
00
Parameter
Description
MASTER TUNE
-102.4 - +102.3[cent]
1st bit3-0→bit15-12
2nd bit3-0→bit11-8
3rd bit3-0→bit7-4
4th bit3-0→bit3-0
0 - 127
-24 - +24[semitones]
n=Drum setup number
00=XG sytem ON
00=ON (receive only)
MASTER VOLUME
TRANSPOSE
DRUM SETUP RESET
XG SYSTEM ON
RESET ALL PARAMETERS
Default value
(H)
00 04 00 00
-400
7F
40
07
<Table 1-3>
MIDI Parameter Change table ( EFFECT 1)
Refer to the “Effect MIDI Map” for a complete list of Reverb, Chorus and Variation type numbers.
Refer to the “Effect Parameter List” for a detailed description of each parameter.
162
Address
(H)
02 01 00
Size
(H)
2
Data
(H)
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
01-7F
Parameter
Description
REVERB TYPE MSB
REVERB TYPE LSB
REVERB PARAMETER 1
REVERB PARAMETER 2
REVERB PARAMETER 3
REVERB PARAMETER 4
REVERB PARAMETER 5
REVERB PARAMETER 6
REVERB PARAMETER 7
REVERB PARAMETER 8
REVERB PARAMETER 9
REVERB PARAMETER 10
REVERB RETURN
REVERB PAN
Refer to Effect Program List
00 : basic type
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
-∞dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
L63...C...R63(1...64...127)
Default value
(H)
01(=HALL1)
00
Depends on reverb type
Depends on reverb type
Depends on reverb type
Depends on reverb type
Depends on reverb type
Depends on reverb type
Depends on reverb type
Depends on reverb type
Depends on reverb type
Depends on reverb type
40
40
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
TOTAL SIZE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0E
02 01 10
11
12
13
14
15
TOTAL SIZE
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
REVERB PARAMETER 11
REVERB PARAMETER 12
REVERB PARAMETER 13
REVERB PARAMETER 14
REVERB PARAMETER 15
REVERB PARAMETER 16
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Depends on reverb type
Depends on reverb type
Depends on reverb type
Depends on reverb type
Depends on reverb type
Depends on reverb type
02 01 20
2
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
TOTAL SIZE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
01-7F
00-7F
CHORUS TYPE MSB
CHORUS TYPE LSB
CHORUS PARAMETER 1
CHORUS PARAMETER 2
CHORUS PARAMETER 3
CHORUS PARAMETER 4
CHORUS PARAMETER 5
CHORUS PARAMETER 6
CHORUS PARAMETER 7
CHORUS PARAMETER 8
CHORUS PARAMETER 9
CHORUS PARAMETER 10
CHORUS RETURN
CHORUS PAN
SEND CHORUS TO REVERB
Refer to Effect MIDI Map
00 : basic type
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
-∞dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
L63...C...R63(1...64...127)
-∞dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
41(=CHORUS1)
00
Depends on chorus type
Depends on chorus type
Depends on chorus type
Depends on chorus type
Depends on chorus type
Depends on chorus type
Depends on chorus type
Depends on chorus type
Depends on chorus type
Depends on chorus type
40
40
00
02 01 30
31
32
33
34
35
TOTAL SIZE
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
CHORUS PARAMETER 11
CHORUS PARAMETER 12
CHORUS PARAMETER 13
CHORUS PARAMETER 14
CHORUS PARAMETER 15
CHORUS PARAMETER 16
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Depends on chorus type
Depends on chorus type
Depends on chorus type
Depends on chorus type
Depends on chorus type
Depends on chorus type
02 01 40
2
42
2
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
VARIATION TYPE MSB
VARIATION TYPE LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 1 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 1 LSB
Refer to Effect Program List
00 : basic type
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
05(=DELAY L,C,R)
00
Depends on variation type
Depends on Variation type
MIDI Data Format • MIDI-Datenformat • Format des donées MIDI
44
2
46
2
48
2
4A
2
4C
2
4E
2
50
2
52
2
54
2
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
1
1
1
1
1
1
TOTAL SIZE
21
02 01 70
71
72
73
74
75
TOTAL SIZE
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
01-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-01
00-01
VARIATION PARAMETER 2 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 2 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 3 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 3 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 4 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 4 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 5 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 5 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 5 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 6 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 7 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 7 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 8 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 8 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 9 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 9 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 10 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 10 LSB
VARIATION RETURN
VARIATION PAN
SEND VARIATION TO REVERB
SEND VARIATION TO CHORUS
VARIATION CONNECTION
VARIATION PART
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
-∞dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
L63...C...R63(1...64...127)
-∞dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
-∞dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
0:INSERTION,1:SYSTEM
OFF(127)
Part 1-16 (0-15)
Depends on Variation type
Depends on Variation type
Depends on Variation type
Depends on Variation type
Depends on Variation type
Depends on Variation type
Depends on Variation type
Depends on Variation type
Depends on Variation type
Depends on Variation type
Depends on Variation type
Depends on Variation type
Depends on Variation type
Depends on Variation type
Depends on Variation type
Depends on Variation type
Depends on Variation type
Depends on Variation type
40
40
00
00
00
7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
VARIATION PARAMETER 11
VARIATION PARAMETER 12
VARIATION PARAMETER 13
VARIATION PARAMETER 14
VARIATION PARAMETER 15
VARIATION PARAMETER 16
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Refer to Effect Parameter List
Depends on variation type
Depends on variation type
Depends on variation type
Depends on variation type
Depends on variation type
Depends on variation type
Default value
(H)
00 (Part other than 10)
01 (Part10)
* “VARIATION” refers to the DSP EFFECT on the panel.
<Table 1-4>
MIDI Parameter Change table ( MULTI PART )
Address
(H)
08 nn 07
Size
(H)
1
Data
(H)
00 - 01
Parameter
Description
PART MODE
0:NORMAL
1:Preset Drum
2 - 3:Drum Setup 1 – 2
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
DRY LEVEL
SCALE TUNING C
SCALE TUNING C#
SCALE TUNING D
SCALE TUNING D#
SCALE TUNING E
SCALE TUNING F
SCALE TUNING F#
SCALE TUNING G
SCALE TUNING G#
SCALE TUNING A
SCALE TUNING A#
SCALE TUNING B
0 - 127
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
-64 - +63[cent]
7F
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
Default value
(H)
40
40
Depends on note
Depends on note
11
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
nn = MIDI Channel (00 – 0F)
<Table 1-5>
MIDI Parameter Change table ( DRUM SETUP )
Address
(H)
3n rr 00
3n rr 01
3n rr 02
3n rr 04
3n rr 05
3n rr 06
3n rr 07
3n rr 0B
3n rr 0C
3n rr 0D
3n rr 0E
3n rr 0F
TOTAL SIZE
Size
(H)
1
1
1
1
Data
(H)
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
Parameter
Description
PITCH COARSE
PITCH FINE
LEVEL
PAN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
REVERB SEND
CHORUS SEND
VARIATION SEND
FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY
FILTER RESONANCE
EG ATTACK
EG DECAY1
EG DECAY2
-64 - +63
-64 - +63[cent]
0 - 127
0:random
1: L63
:
64: C (center)
:
127: R63
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
-64 - 63
-64 - 63
-64 - 63
-64 - 63
-64 - 63
Depends on note
Depends on note
7F
40
40
40
40
40
[Note]
n:
Drum Setup number (0 to 1)
rr:
Note number (0D to 54)
Receipt of “XG System On” or “GM System On” message generates reinitialization of all DRUM SETUP parameters.
“Drum Setup Reset” message can be used to reinitialize drum setup parameters.
163
MIDI Data Format • MIDI-Datenformat • Format des donées MIDI
● Effect MIDI Map
Reverb Type
MSB (HEX)
00
01
02
03
04
05
:
00F
10
11
12
13
14
:
7F
TYPE LSB (HEX)
00
01
No Effect
<——
[1]Hall 1
Hall 2
Room 1
Room 2
Stage 1
Stage 2
Plate
<——
No Effect
<——
:
<——
No Effect
<——
[13]WhiteRoom <——
[14]Tunnel
<——
[15]Canyon
<——
[16]Basement
<——
No Effect
<——
:
<——
No Effect
<——
02
<——
<——
Room 3
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<—— .......... same as BASIC EFFECT(LSB=0)
03~07
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
08
<——
[2]Hall 2
[5]Room 1
[9]Stage 1
[11]Plate 1
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
09
<——
[3]Hall 3
[6]Room 2
[10]Stage 2
[12]Plate 2
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
0A
<——
[4]Hall 4
[7]Room 3
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
0B
<——
<——
[8]Room 4
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
0C
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
0D~
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
[ ] ........... Panel Effect Number
Chorus Type
MSB (HEX)
00
01
:
40
41
42
43
44
45
:
7F
TYPE LSB (HEX)
00
01
No Effect
<——
No Effect
<——
:
<——
No Effect
<——
Chorus 1
Chorus 5
Chorus 4
Celeste 2
Flanger 1
Flanger 4
Symphonic
<——
No Effect
<——
:
<——
No Effect
<——
02
<——
<——
<——
<——
Chorus 3
Celeste 3
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
03~07
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
08
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Chorus 2
Flanger 1
Symphonic 1
<——
<——
<——
09
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Chorus 3
Flanger 2
<——
<——
<——
<——
0A
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Chorus 1
Flanger 3
<——
<——
<——
<——
0B
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
0C
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
0D~
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
02
<——
<——
Room 3
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
[48]Karaoke3
<——
<——
<——
<——
Chorus 3
Celeste 3
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
03~07
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
08
<——
[2]Hall 2
[5]Room 1
[9]Stage 1
[11]Plate 1
[38]Delay LCR
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
[18]Chorus 2
[22]Flanger 1
[26]Symphonic
[28]Rotary Sp1
[33]Tremolo1
[36]AutoPan
<——
<——
<——
[42]Dist. HARD
[44]EQ DISCO
<——
[37]Auto Wah
<——
<——
09
<——
[3]Hall 3
[6]Room 2
[10]Stage 2
[12]Plate 2
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
[19]Chorus 3
[23]Flanger 2
<——
<——
<——
[29]Rotary Sp2
<——
<——
<——
[43]Dist. SOFT
[45]EQ TEL
<——
<——
<——
<——
0A
<——
[4]Hall 4
[7]Room 3
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
[17]Chorus 1
[24]Flanger 3
<——
Rotary Sp3
[31]Rotary Sp4
[30]Rotary Sp3
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
0B
<——
<——
[8]Room 4
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
[32]Rotary Sp5
<——
<——
Rotary Sp4
Tremolo 4
[34]Tremolo2
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
0C
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
[35]Gtr Tremolo
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
0D~
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<—— .......... same as BASIC EFFECT(LSB=0)
Variation Type (DSP EFFECT)
MSB (HEX)
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
:
13
14
15
:
3F
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
:
7F
TYPE LSB (HEX)
00
01
No Effect
<——
[1]Hall 1
Hall 2
Room 1
Room 2
Stage 1
Stage 2
Plate
<——
Delay L,C,R
<——
[39]Delay L,R
<——
[40]Echo
<——
[41]Cross Delay <——
[13]Early Ref 1 [14]Early Ref 2
[15]Gate Reverb <——
[16]ReverseGate <——
No Effect
<——
:
<——
No Effect
<——
[46]Karaoke1
[47]Karaoke2
No Effect
<——
:
<——
No Effect
<——
True
<——
Chorus 1
[21]Chorus 5
[20]Chorus 4
Celeste 2
Flanger 1
[25]Flanger 4
Symphonic
<——
Rotary SP.
<——
Tremolo
<——
Auto Pan
<——
[27]Phaser
<——
[49]Distortion
<——
[50]Over Drive <——
Amp Sim.
<——
3Band EQ
<——
2Band EQ
<——
Auto Wah
<——
No Effect
<——
Pitch Change
<——
([51]Unison,
[52]5thHarmony)
No Effect
<——
[53]Touch Wah [54]Wah+Dist.
[55]Compresser <——
[56]Noise Gate <——
No Effect
<——
:
<——
No Effect
<——
<—— .......... same as BASIC EFFECT(LSB=0)
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
[ ] ........... Panel Effect Number
* The effect name appearing in the LCD display may be abbreviated.
164
MIDI Data Format • MIDI-Datenformat • Format des donées MIDI
● Effect Parameter List
BASIC TYPE No.
Parameter
Display*
Value
BASIC TYPE No.
Parameter
Display*
Value
CHORUS
CELESTE
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
LFO Frequency
LFO PM Depth
Feedback Level
Delay Offset
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
Dry/Wet
EQ Mid Frequency
EQ Mid Gain
EQ Mid Width
LFO AM Depth
Input Mode
0.00~39.7Hz
0~127
-63~+63
0~127
50Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
100Hz~10.0kHz
-12~+12dB
1.0~12.0
0~127
mono/stereo
0-127
0-63
1-127
0-127
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
14-54
52-76
10-120
0-127
0-1
PHASER
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
LFO Frequency
LFO Depth
Phase Shift Offset
Feedback Level
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
Dry/Wet
Stage
Diffusion
LFO Phase Difference
0.00~39.7Hz
0~127
0~127
-63~+63
50Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
3~10
Mono/Stereo
-180~+180deg.
0-127
0-127
0-127
1-127
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
3-10
0-1
4-124
DISTORTION
OVERDRIVE
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LFO Frequency
LFO Depth
Feedback Level
Delay Offset
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
Dry/Wet
EQ Mid Frequency
EQ Mid Gain
EQ Mid Width
LFO Phase Difference
0.00~39.7Hz
0~127
-63~+63
0~63
50Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
100Hz~10.0kHz
-12~+12dB
1.0~12.0
-180~+180deg
0-127
0-127
1-127
0-63
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
14-54
52-76
10-120
4-124
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
Drive
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
LPF Cutoff
Output Level
EQ Mid Frequency
EQ Mid Gain
EQ Mid Width
Dry/Wet
Edge(Clip Curve)
0~127
50Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
1.0k~Thru
0~127
500Hz~10.0kHz
-12~+12dB
1.0~12.0
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
0~127
0-127
8-40
52-76
34-60
0-127
28-54
52-76
10-120
1-127
0-127
GUITAR AMP
SIMULATOR
1
2
3
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
LFO Frequency
LFO Depth
Delay Offset
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
Dry/Wet
EQ Mid Frequency
EQ Mid Gain
EQ Mid Width
0.00~39.7Hz
0~127
0~127
50Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
100Hz~10.0kHz
-12~+12dB
1.0~12.0
0-127
0-127
0-127
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
14-54
52-76
10-120
1
2
3
4
10
11
Drive
AMP Type
LPF Cutoff
Output Level
Dry/Wet
Edge(Clip Curve)
0~127
Off,Stack,Combo,Tube
1.0k~Thru
0~127
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
0~127
0-127
0-3
34-60
0-127
1-127
0-127
1
2
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
LFO Frequency
LFO Depth
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
Dry/Wet
EQ Mid Frequency
EQ Mid Gain
EQ Mid Width
0.00~39.7Hz
0~127
50Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
100Hz~10.0kHz
-12~+12dB
1.0~12.0
0-127
0-127
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
14-54
52-76
10-120
1
2
3
6
7
8
9
11
12
13
14
15
LFO Frequency
AM Depth
PM Depth
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
EQ Mid Frequency
EQ Mid Gain
EQ Mid Width
LFO Phase Difference
Input Mode
0.00~39.7Hz
0~127
0~127
50Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
100Hz~10.0kHz
-12~+12dB
1.0~12.0
-180~+180deg
mono/stereo
0-127
0-127
0-127
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
14-54
52-76
10-120
4-124
0-1
LFO Frequency
L/R Depth
F/R Depth
PAN Direction
0.00~39.7Hz
0~127
0~127
L<->R,L->R,L<-R,Lturn,
Rturn,L/R
50Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
100Hz~10.0kHz
-12~+12dB
1.0~12.0
0-127
0-127
0-127
FLANGER
SYMPHONIC
ROTARY
SPEAKER
TREMOLO
AUTO PAN
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
11
12
13
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
EQ Mid Frequency
EQ Mid Gain
EQ Mid Width
3BAND EQ
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
EQ Low Gain
EQ Mid Frequency
EQ Mid Gain
EQ Mid Width
EQ High Gain
EQ Low Frequency
EQ High Frequency
-12~+12dB
500Hz~10.0kHz
-12~+12dB
1.0~12.0
-12~+12dB
50Hz~2.0kHz
500Hz~16.0kHz
52-76
28-54
52-76
10-120
52-76
8-40
28-58
2BAND EQ
1
2
3
4
11
12
13
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
EQ Mid Frequency
EQ Mid Gain
EQ Mid Width
50Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
100Hz~10.0kHz
-12~+12dB
1.0~12.0
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
14-54
52-76
10-120
AUTO WAH
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
LFO Frequency
LFO Depth
Cutoff Frequency Offset
Resonance
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
Dry/Wet
Drive
0.00~39.7Hz
0~127
0~127
1.0~12.0
50Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
0~127
0-127
0-127
0-127
10-120
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
0-127
HALL
ROOM
STAGE
PLATE
1
2
3
4
5
10
11
12
13
14
15
Reverb Time
Diffusion
Initial Delay
HPF Cutoff
LPF Cutoff
Dry/Wet
Rev Delay
Density
Er/Rev Balance
High Damp
Feedback Level
0.3~30.0s
0~10
0~63
Thru~8.0kHz
1.0k~Thru
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
0~63
0~3
E63>R ~ E=R ~ E<R63
0.1~1.0
-63~+63
0-69
0-10
0-63
0-52
34-60
1-127
0-63
0-3
1-127
1-10
1-127
0-5
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
14-54
52-76
10-120
165
MIDI Data Format • MIDI-Datenformat • Format des donées MIDI
BASIC TYPE No.
Parameter
Display*
Value
BASIC TYPE No.
Parameter
Display*
Value
DELAY L,C,R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Lch Delay
Rch Delay
Cch Delay
Feedback Delay
Feedback Level
Cch Level
High Damp
Dry/Wet
HPF Cutoff
LPF Cutoff
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
0.1~715.0ms
0.1~715.0ms
0.1~715.0ms
0.1~715.0ms
-63~+63
0~127
0.1~1.0
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
Thru~8.0kHz
1.0k~Thru
50Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
1-7150
1-7150
1-7150
1-7150
1-127
0-127
1-10
1-127
0-52
34-60
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
GATE REVERB
REVERSE
GATE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
Type
Room Size
Diffusion
Initial Delay
Feedback Level
HPF Cutoff
LPF Cutoff
Dry/Wet
Liveness
Density
High Damp
TypeA,TypeB
0.1~7.0
0~10
0~63
-63~+63
Thru~8.0kHz
1.0k~Thru
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
0~10
0~3
0.1~1.0
0-1
0-44
0-10
0-63
1-127
0-52
34-60
1-127
0-10
0-3
1-10
PITCH
CHENGE
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Lch Delay
Rch Delay
Feedback Delay 1
Feedback Delay 2
Feedback Level
High Damp
Dry/Wet
HPF Cutoff
LPF Cutoff
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
0.1~715.0ms
0.1~715.0ms
0.1~715.0ms
0.1~715.0ms
-63~+63
0.1~1.0
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
Thru~8.0kHz
1.0k~Thru
50Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
1-7150
1-7150
1-7150
1-7150
1-127
1-10
1-127
0-52
34-60
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
1
2
3
4
5
10
11
12
13
14
Pitch
Initial Delay
Fine 1
Fine 2
Feedback Gain
Dry/Wet
Pan 1
Output Level 1
Pan 2
Output Level2
-24~+24
0~127
-50~+50
-50~+50
-99~+99%
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
L63~R63
0~127
L63~R63
0~127
40-88
0-127
14-114
14-114
1-127
1-127
1-127
0-127
1-127
0-127
TOUCH WAH
WAH+DIST.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Lch Delay1
Lch Feedback Level
Rch Delay1
Rch Feedback Level
High Damp
Lch Delay2
Rch Delay2
Delay2 Level
Dry/Wet
HPF Cutoff
LPF Cutoff
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
0.1~355.0ms
-63~+63
0.1~355.0ms
-63~+63
0.1~1.0
0.1~355.0ms
0.1~355.0ms
0~127
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
Thru~8.0kHz
1.0k~Thru
50Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
1-3550
1-127
1-3550
1-127
1-10
1-3550
1-3550
0-127
1-127
0-52
34-60
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
1
2
3
6
7
8
9
10
11
Sensitive
Cutoff Frequency Offset
Resonance
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
Dry/Wet
Drive
0~127
0~127
1.0~12.0
32Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
0~127
0-127
0-127
10-120
4-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
0-127
COMPRESSOR
1
2
3
4
5
Attack
Release
Threshold
Ratio
Output Level
1~40ms
10~680ms
-48~-6UdB
1.0~20.0
0~127
0-19
0-15
79-121
0-7
0-127
NOISE GATE
1
2
3
4
Attack
Release
Threshold
Output Level
1~40ms
10~680ms
-72~-30dB
0~127
0-19
0-15
55-97
0-127
CROSS
DELAY
1
2
3
4
5
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
L->R Delay
R->L Delay
Feedback Level
Input Select
High Damp
Dry/Wet
HPF Cutoff
LPF Cutoff
EQ Low Frequency
EQ Low Gain
EQ High Frequency
EQ High Gain
0.1~355.0ms
0.1~355.0ms
-63~+63
L,R,L&R
0.1~1.0
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
Thru~8.0kHz
1.0k~Thru
50Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
1-3550
1-3550
1-127
0-2
1-10
1-127
0-52
34-60
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
WHITE ROOM
TUNNEL
CANYON
BASEMENT
EARLY REF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
Type
Room Size
Diffusion
Initial Delay
Feedback Level
HPF Cutoff
LPF Cutoff
Dry/Wet
Liveness
Density
High Damp
S-H, L-H, Rdm, Rvs, Plt, Spr
0.1~7.0
0~10
0~63
-63~+63
Thru~8.0kHz
1.0k~Thru
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
0~10
0~3
0.1~1.0
0-5
0-44
0-10
0-63
1-127
0-52
34-60
1-127
0-10
0-3
1-10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Reverb Time
Diffusion
Initial Delay
HPF Cutoff
LPF Cutoff
Width
Heigt
Depth
Wall Vary
Dry/Wet
Rev Delay
Density
Er/Rev Balance
High Damp
Feedback Level
0.3~30.0s
0~10
0~63
Thru~8.0kHz
1.0k~Thru
0.5~10.2m
0.5~20.2m
0.5~30.2m
0~30
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
0~63
0~3
E63>R ~ E=R ~ E<R63
0.1~1.0
-63~+63
0-69
0-10
0-63
0-52
34-60
0-37
0-73
0-104
0-30
1-127
0-63
0-3
1-127
1-10
1-127
KARAOKE
1
2
3
4
10
Delay Time
Feedback Level
HPF Cutoff
LPF Cutoff
Dry/Wet
0~127
-63~+63
Thru~8.0kHz
1.0k~Thru
D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63
0-127
1-127
0-52
34-60
1-127
DELAY L,R
ECHO
* Only parameters 1 through 5 can be edited via panel control for
effects which can be selected via panel control. The 3 band equalizer is an exception to this rule.
* Basic Type effects are different from DSP Effect Types appearing
in the LCD display.
166
Sample Data Disks
EMS PK27S001
Sound Effects
24 great new sound effects - animals, machines, movies,..
EMS PK27S003
Vocal Hooks
Shouts, Sung Chorus, Females, Bass Vox
EMS PK27S004
Instruments
DX Piano, Clavi, Classic Organ, Vintage E. Piano, new synths,... (2 disks)
EMS PK27S005
House & Techno
Drum Loops, Scratches, Hits, Vox, Synths, Basses
EMS PK27S006
Dance & Soul
Drum Loops, Hits, Pads, Basses, Synths, Percussion
EMS PK27S007
Latin & Ethnic
Latin, Afro & Ethnic Loops, Ethnic Instruments, Pan Pipe, Flamenco Guitar
EMS PK27S008
Jazz & Funk
Jazz & Funk Loops, Bass & Slide, Organ, Synth Clav, Saxophone
EMS PK27S009
Rock & Pop
Drum Loops, Hits, Stabs & Squeals, Guitars, Organs, Synths
EMS PK27S010
Ambient Textures
Ethereal synth sounds for film style composition and soundtracks
EMS PK27S011
Grand Piano
A high quality multi-sampled grand piano
EMS PK27S012
Eastern Elements
Assortment of exotic ethnic instruments and rhythmic loops
EMS PK27S013
Traditional Keys
More great keyboards - theatre organ, church organ, harpsichord,..
EMS PK27S014
Real Drums
New sampled drums as they really sound !
SP-2701YE
Traditional Instruments 1 & 2
Accordeon, Trumpet, Tuba, Mandolin, Zither, Harmonica, etc. (2 disks)
SP-2702YE
Analogue Synthesizer 1 & 2
Pads, Basses, SynBrass, Sweeps, Sync Sounds, etc. (2 disks)
SP-2703YE
Pop & Rock Instruments / World Of Guitars
Clean & Heavy Guitars, E.Piano, Sax, 12-strings, etc. (2 disks)
SP-2704YE
Classical Instruments / Ethnics
Violins, Cello, Reeds, Gongs, Bells, Pads, Synth sounds, etc. (2 disks)
SP-2705YE
Gaudi / Super Effects
Spoken German, Sci-Fi, Electric Atmospheres, etc. (2 disks)
* Not all titles in the above list are available in all areas.
Please consult your Yamaha dealer for details of availability.
167
Specifications • Technische Daten • Spécifications
KEYBOARD:
61 Keys (C1~C6) with Touch Response (Initial/After)
POLYPHONY:
64 Notes max.
VOICES:
Preset 473 voices (including 9 Percussion kits)
Custom 32 voices (Programmable)
ACCOMPANIMENT:
Accompaniment styles:
Preset 120 + Disk 32 styles
Custom 32 styles
Auto Bass Chord:
Single Finger/Fingered 1/Fingered 2/Full Keyboard/
Auto MIDI Bass/Manual MIDI Bass
Chord Assist
Arranger:
RHYTHM, BASS, CHORD, PAD, PHRASE
ONE TOUCH SETTING:
4 settings are available for each preset style
EXPRESSION & EFFECT:
Reverb 16 types
Chorus 10 types
DSP Effect 56 types
Lead Effect 18 types
Harmony 16 types
Digital Equalizer (5 bands, 6 types)
Sustain
Left Hold
Pitch Bend Wheel
Modulation Wheel
MULTI PAD:
1~8 (Phrase/Chord, Percussion)
SONG RECORD:
Quick Record:
Manual/Accomp. Tracks
Chord Step Record, Edit (Delete)
Multi Track Record:
1~16 Tracks
Punch In, Volume, Edit (Quantize, Track Mix, Initial
Edit, Delete)
SONG PLAY:
Single, All, Chain, Random
Solo/Play/Mute
REGISTRATION MEMORY:
DISPLAY:
LCD (240 x 320 dots)
DISK:
Load from Disk, Save to Disk, Rename File/Song,
Delete File/Song, Format FD, Song Copy
Hard Disk Interface
* 3.5" FDD, Compatibility with DOC (Yamaha Disk Orchestra
Collection) PianoSoft, General MIDI, and SFF software.
FUNCTIONS:
F1: Scale (Arabic)/Voice Part
F2: Split Point/ABC Mode/Multi Pad
F3: Controller
F4: Style Revoice
F5: Reverb/Chorus/DSP Effect
F6: Harmony/Registration
F7: Utility
F8: MIDI
DEMONSTRATIONS:
14 Songs
CONNECTORS:
MIDI (IN/OUT/THRU), AUX IN (R, L/L+R),
AUX OUT (R, L/L+R), FOOT SWITCH 1/2,
FOOT VOLUME, PHONES, MIC
AMPLIFIER:
20W x 2
SPEAKERS:
16cm x 2, 5cm x 2
DIMENSIONS (W x H x D):
1058 mm (41-2/3") x 446 mm (17-1/2") x 178 mm (7")
WEIGHT:
14.5 kg (31 lbs. 15 oz)
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES:
• AC Cord
• Music Stand
• Supplied Disk
• Owner’s Manual
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES:
• Foot switch
• Foot Volume
• Headphones
• Keyboard stand
• Hard Disk
FC5
FC7
HPE-150
L-5, LW-12
16 banks x 8 setups, Freeze
HELP FUNCTION:
Five languages
(English, German, French, Spanish and Italian)
168
* Specifications subject to change without notice.
* Änderungen ohne Vorankündigung vorbehalten.
* Sous toute réserve de modification des caractéristiques sans préavis.
* Especificaciones sujetas a cambios sin previo aviso.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.
WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product,
basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found
in this manual BEFORE marking any connections, including connection to the main supply.
2.
Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are
manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where
they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about
the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for
supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The
required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name
plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special
Message Section of this manual.
9.
This product should be used only with the components
supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the
manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all
safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory
product.
10.
The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected
from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for
extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when
there is a high probability of lightening and/or electrical storm
activity.
11.
3.
This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one
blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug into
the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem persists,
contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet replaced. Do NOT
defeat the safety purpose of the plug.
4.
Some electronic products utilize external power supplies or
adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual, on
the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha.
5.
WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects
on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could
walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords
of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If
you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25'
cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number,
the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension
cords, consult a local electrician.
6.
Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations that
do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for enclosed
installations are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed
ventilation is required.
7.
8.
This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp
locations and should not be used near water or exposed to rain.
Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa,
tub, sink, or wet basement.
Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be
installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to their
operating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat
sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices that
produce heat should be avoided.
Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids
are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may
exist.
12.
Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a
qualified service person when:
a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or
b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been
spilled into the enclosure through openings; or
c. The product has been exposed to rain: or
d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change
in performance; or
e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the
product has been damaged.
13.
Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing
should be referred to qualified service personnel.
14.
This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing
sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT
operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a
level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or
ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period
before damage occurs.
15.
Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the
product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that
benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are
well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are
designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
92-469-2
169
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded
cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15
for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your
use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in
the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC
regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the
source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America,
Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
CANADA
THIS DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE “CLASS
B” LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM DIGITAL
APPARATUS SET OUT IN THE RADIO INTERFERENCE REGULATION OF THE CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS.
LE PRESENT APPAREIL NUMERIQUE N’EMET PAS DE
BRUITS RADIOELECTRIQUES DEPASSANT LES LIMITES
APPLICABLES AUX APPAREILS NUMERIQUES DE LA
“CLASSE B” PRESCRITES DANS LE REGLEMENT SUR LE
BROUILLAGE RADIOELECTRIQUE EDICTE PAR LE
MINISTERE DES COMMUNICATIONS DU CANADA.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH
WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS
ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE
LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE
ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND.
•
•
•
•
This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
Dies bezieht sich nur auf die von der Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. vertriebenen Produkte.
Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
Esto se aplica solamente a productos distribuidos por Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM
Connecting the Plug and Cord
IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in
accordance with the following code:
BLUE
BROWN
: NEUTRAL
: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus
may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the
terminals in your plug proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal
of the three pin plug.
• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands)
OBSERVERA!
Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte
Batterien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie
können bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll
abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune.
Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) sá länge som
den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har
stängts av.
ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,
sálæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt —
ogsá selvom der or slukket pá apparatets afbryder.
VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita
koko laitetta verkosta.